TABLE OF CONTENTS
NEW JERSEY WATER SUPPLY AUTHORITY
MONMOUTH COUNTY, NEW JERSEY
Manasquan Water Treatment Plant
Distribution Wet Well Upgrades
Contract No. WSA C15000W
Technical Specifications
Division 1
01150
01300
01505
01650
Special Conditions
CPM Construction Schedule
Mobilization/Demobilization
Facility Starting /Testing
Division 2
02050
02502
02600
02602
02618
02640
General
Site Work
Demolition
Restoration of Surfaces
Pipeline Installation
Leakage Tests
Ductile Iron Pipe
Tapped Connections
Division 3
Concrete
03300 Cast-in-place Concrete
Division 9
Finishes
09900 Field Painting
Division 11
Equipment
11286 Stainless Steel Hydraulic Gates
Division 15
15050
15075
15115
15122
15140
Mechanical
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Mechanical Identification
Wall Castings and Sleeves
Miscellaneous Valves and Traps
Pipe Hangers and Supports
Table of Contents
Manasquan Water Treatment Plant Rev 9/16/15
CONTRACT No. WSA C15000W
Page 1 of 2
Division 16
16010
16060
16095
16110
16120
16410
Electrical
Electrical General
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
Identification for Electrical Systems
Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cable
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Division 17 Control Systems Integration
17012 Control Systems Integrator
17905 Process Control System
17910 Wireless Communications
Table of Contents
Manasquan Water Treatment Plant Rev 9/16/15
CONTRACT No. WSA C15000W
Page 2 of 2
01150-1
2992/60270
SECTION 01150
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Contents
SC 1 - GENERAL
SC 2 - PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
SC 3 - PROJECT MEETINGS
SC 4 - OPERATION OF VALVES AND CONNECTIONS
SC 5 - DRAINING OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND TANKS PRIOR TO WORK
SC 6 - PERMITS AND APPROVALS
SC 7 - MODIFICATION TO EXISTING 36” BALL VALVE AND 36” BUTTERFLY VALVE
SC 8 - CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE AND INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE
SC 9 - DISINFECTION OF EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND TANKAGE
SC 10 - EMERGENCY CALLS
SC 11 - TESTING PLAN
SC 12 - SAFETY AND PROTECTION
SC 13 - BORINGS AND OTHER SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
SC 14 - SITE CONDITIONS AND CONDITIONS OF WORK
SC 15 - SEDIMENT AND EROSION CONTROL
SC 16 - RODENT AND PEST CONTROL
SC 17 - CONSTRUCTION STAKEOUT
SC 18 - PROJECT PHOTOGRAPHS
SC 19 - PRECONSTRUCTION VIDEO TAPING
SC 20 - ACCESS LIMITATIONS
SC 21 - AUTHORITY’S RIGHT TO EXISTING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
SC 22 - WATER PRIVILAGES
SC 23 - MAINTAINING FLOW OF SEWERS, WATERLINES AND DRAINS
SC 24 - EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
SC 25 - SHOP DRAWINGS
SC 26 - MODEL NUMBERS FOR EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND SYSTEMS
SC 27 - MANUFACTURERS
SC 28 - TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
SC 29 - STORAGE AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT
SC 30 - LUBRICATION CHART AND LUBRICATION
SC 31 - POWER, FUEL & WATER FOR TESTING
SC 32 - AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
SC 33 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SC 34 - MESUREMENT AND PAYMENT
SC 35 - FINAL CLEANING UP
09/02/15
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
7
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
11
11
11
12
13
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
17
18
Special Conditions
01150-2
2992/60270
SC 1 - GENERAL
These Special Conditions are hereby made a part of this Contract.
The plans and specifications are intended to cover a complete project. Failure to mention any
work which would normally be required to complete the project shall not relieve the Contractor
of their responsibility to perform such work.
Prior to the start of construction by the successful bidder, a general information meeting shall be
held with the Authority, Engineer, Contractor and other interested parties in attendance. The
meeting shall cover the general features of the project and the various requirements in the
Contract. The Contractor shall submit a draft work schedule prior to the meeting in accordance
with the Section 01300.
Prior to site mobilization, the Contractor shall submit their intended plans for mobilization,
safety, security, traffic and housekeeping programs in writing to the Engineer and shall not
mobilize until receipt of approval. The implementation and enforcement of these programs shall
become the responsibility of a designated representative of the Contractor's staff. The duties of
said designee shall also include the responsibility for enforcing the requirements of the
Occupational Safety and Health Act, and other applicable Federal, State and local standards. Any
changes in the programs must be submitted and approved in writing in advance. Refer to section
01505 for additional requirements on Mobilization/Demobilization.
The Contractor shall be responsible for having taken steps reasonably necessary to ascertain the
nature and location of the work, and the general and local conditions which can affect the work or
the cost thereof. Any failure by the Contractor to do so will not relieve them from responsibility
for successfully performing the work without additional expense. The Authority and Engineer
assume no responsibility for any understanding or representations concerning conditions made by
any of its officers or agents prior to the execution of this Contract, unless such understanding or
representations by the Authority or Engineer are expressly stated in the Contract.
Blasting shall not be permitted.
SC 2 - PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
The Authority, the Engineer and the Contractor will be invited to the pre-construction conference.
The pre-construction meeting will occur three weeks from notice to proceed. The following
items shall be included in the conference:


A quick tour of the construction site.
A meeting immediately after the site tour to discuss the procedures to be followed to
comply with the construction of the contract documents and applicable regulations.
SC 3 - PROJECT MEETINGS
09/02/15
Special Conditions
01150-3
2992/60270
The Contractor shall be responsible for weekly status meetings and monthly progress meetings.
Details for progress meetings are including in Specification 01300 – CPM Schedule. Weekly
meetings should be provided to update the Authority regarding modifications to the CPM
schedule and identify areas impacting the construction or operation of the WTP.
SC 4 - OPERATION OF VALVES AND CONNECTIONS
The Contractor shall contact the New Jersey Water Supply Authority (Authority) at least 48 hours
in advance of beginning construction of any interconnection piping. The Authority will operate
any existing valves necessary for construction.
SC 5 - DRAINING OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND TANKS PRIOR TO WORK
The Authority will drain the existing tanks prior to initiating work in and around those structures.
The contractor will be responsible for removing residual solids in the bottom of the tank (those
left after tank draining). The Contractor shall notify the Authority a minimum of two weeks in
advance prior to their need to have the tanks drained. Once the Contractor has begun work within
or around the structure, they shall be responsible for maintaining dewatered conditions within the
structure until the work has been completed.
SC 6 - PERMITS AND APPROVALS
The Authority has secured and paid for the following permits and approvals:
Department of Community Affairs: Bureau of construction review – complete plan release
The Contractor shall conform to all requirements of this permit. A copy of the permit will be
provided to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be responsible to obtain the local building
permits and comply with all requirements including but not necessarily limited to scheduling
and being present for all necessary building inspections.
All other permits and approvals necessary for this project are the responsibility of the Contractor.
The Authority shall reimburse the Contractor for any building permit related fees.
SC 7 - MODIFICATION TO EXISTING 36” BALL VALVE AND 36” BUTTERFLY VALVE
Pratt 36” rubber seat ball valve, class 150: The valve that controls the return of water from the
reservoir into the distribution chamber is a Pratt Ball valve. It has two Buna –N E-Lok style
seats being a double seat type valve. Both seats leak. The contractor is to hire a Pratt valve
technical service representative to replace in the field the main shaft bearing and the two E-Lok
style seats in this valve. One seat shall be replaced while working inside the wet well once the
New Jersey American Water existing suction piping has been removed. The upstream seat shall
be replaced after the contractor removes the dresser and the flange by plain end adapter. This
work shall be completed in 5 calendar days.
Pratt 36” Triton butterfly valve: Contractor shall have the Pratt valve technical service
representative replace the seat on this valve. The valve serial number is 76950-7.
SC 8 - CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE AND INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE
09/02/15
Special Conditions
01150-4
2992/60270
The Contractor’s Work Schedule shall identify the proposed sequence of construction and all
required interruptions of service. All required interruptions of service for any existing plant
facility or system shall be clearly identified on the schedule as to the date when such occurrence
will take place and the duration of each event. The Contractor shall also submit a separate listing
of all required service interruptions of existing facilities which identifies:
1) the facilities affected by the proposed interruption;
2) the duration of the interruption;
3) any Authority activities which are required (valve operation, etc.); and
4) an explanation of the need for the interruption.
No service interruptions will be allowed except those found to be unavoidable by the Authority.
Any unavoidable service interruptions shall be performed as expeditiously as possible to
minimize interruption time. Unavoidable service interruptions should be grouped together in the
same interruption period where possible.
All work that requires service interruptions must be coordinated with the Authority and shall be
scheduled and approved by the Authority at least 30 calendar days prior to the service
interruption(s). The Contractor shall submit in addition to their schedule a detailed work plan for
the activities to be completed during the interruption and obtain written approval from the
Authority prior to beginning such work. The work plan shall at a minimum include the following
information:




Required assistance from the Authority (this may include valves to shut, area of WTP to
be cleared of vehicles, power required, etc)
Materials and equipment required to perform work
Labor or trades necessary
A daily schedule of expected work to be completed.
The Contractor shall have all materials and equipment on-site, and shall receive the Authority’s
approval prior to initiating any work which requires a service interruption. If the Authority
requires the Contractor to return the plant to full service, the Contractor shall do so expeditiously.
The Contractor shall allow in their bid reasonable time to accommodate operations at the water
treatment plant, including the need for the Authority to respond to emergencies. The Contractor
shall not be eligible for additional compensation due to interruptions of the Contractor’s schedule
in order for the Authority to respond to routine or emergency conditions.
During any of the agreed upon scheduled shutdowns, other contractors and Authority forces may
be on site performing work throughout the plant. The Contractor must not deviate from the
approved work plan and shall employ such methods or means as not to cause any interruption of
or interference with the work of any other contractors or subcontractors. Work by other
contractors may include ongoing projects contracted by the Authority, or operations conducted by
the Authority, whether or not they are directly associated with this Contract. All contractors will
be required to cooperate to the end that the projects will all be brought to a successful conclusion
as rapidly as possible, but the Authority cannot guarantee that no interference or delay will be
caused thereby. The Contractor shall have no recourse against the Authority for any damages
whatsoever with regard to any interference or delay occasioned by the work or operations of the
Authority or of others with the operations of the Contractor or of their subcontractors.
09/02/15
Special Conditions
01150-5
2992/60270
The following shut down period is anticipated by the owner and shall be incorporated into the
Contractors schedule:
A.
EXTENDED WATER TREATMENT PLANT SHUT DOWN
It will be necessary to take production down at the WTP in order to make modifications, as
shown on the contract drawings, to the existing piping and tankage. This extended shut down of
21 calendar days shall occur from March 1, 2016 through April 30, 2016.
The Authority will suffer financial loss if work is not competed during the proposed 21 calendar
days. Therefore, the Contractor will be assessed $25,000 per calendar day that the uncompleted
project causes the plant to be shut down beyond the allowed extended shut down period.
The treatment plant shutdown shall be coordinated with the Authority. The Contractor shall
provide a detailed schedule for work to be performed during the shutdown and shall include a
daily work plan as noted in SC 8.
In order to complete the shut down in a timely manner, several major tasks will need to be
completed prior to this period. The Authority will not allow for the extended shut down to occur
if these tasks have not been completed or a viable alternative developed. These shall include, but
not be limited to the following items:
Mechanical and Structural Work
o Review and approval of all shop drawings
o Delivery of all materials and equipment
o Review and approval of Contractor’s safety plan
o Approval of concrete testing laboratory
Electrical and Instrumentation Work
o Termination and testing of instrumentation associated with these modifications.
o SCADA modifications and electrical work that do not require a plant shutdown.
The following operations must be completed by the end of the plant shutdown period:
Modifications to the existing raw water distribution wet well including demolition of the existing
piping, concrete pours, form removal, installation of gates, core drills, installation of new piping
activities and cleaning.
Modifications to the existing flow control ball valve.
• Addition of the new knife gate valve (valve pre-purchased by NJWSA. Contractor shall
install the valve).
Concrete test results that meet the project requirements/specifications.
• Distribution well cleaned and ready to be put into service
• Satisfactory test results of all new equipment installed.
Any proposed deviations from the above noted list shall be coordinated with the Authority at least
30 calendar days prior to the shutdown. It is expected that following the shutdown, the Authority
expects to have the full use of the water treatment plant.
At the beginning of the shutdown, the Authority will stop the raw water flow from entering the
plant and will open the raw water distribution well drain valve.
09/25/15
Special Conditions
01150-6
2992/60270
If requested by the Contractor, at least 30 days in advance, the Authority will accommodate a
secondary shut down of 3 consecutive calendar days for installation of the gates in the newly
constructed wall. The need for the secondary shut down may result from a prolonged delivery
date of the slide gates from the manufacturer. The secondary shutdown shall occur in April, 2016.
It shall be contractor’s responsibility to complete the modifications to the flow control valve and
install the knife gate valve as noted above, such that NJWSA can stop the raw water flow from
entering the wet well and drain the wet well at least 90% of the volume for the contractor to
perform work during the secondary shutdown. Liquidated damages as noted above will be
assessed to the contractor if the plant is not brought online at the end of the 3-day secondary
shutdown. The secondary shutdown shall be from Tuesday to Thursday.
SC 9 - DISINFECTION OF EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND TANKAGE
NOT USED.
SC 10 - EMERGENCY CALLS
The Contractor shall provide the Authority with the phone numbers of at least three responsible
persons, to be used during non-working hours and weekends. These three individuals shall be in
a position to dispatch labor and equipment to the project in the event of an emergency.
SC 11 - TESTING PLAN
1. The Contractor shall provide all services associated with conducting the detailed testing plan
prior to conditional acceptance of any of the facilities constructed under this contract. Testing
plans shall be developed for the raw water distribution chamber and associated electrical
components.
2. The Testing Plan should include, but is not limited to, the following:
a) Individual equipment and tankage testing - Contractor to review specifications to
confirm testing requirement in the technical specifications for each piece of
equipment and tankage. These tests are to be incorporated into the Testing Plan and
construction schedule
b) Construction Sequencing and Interruption of Services – Those interruptions outlined
in the Special Conditions shall be incorporated into the Testing Plan.
c) Documentation of Tests – Items that are required after installation of equipment and
systems may include but not be limited to:
a. Manufacturer’s certificate / acceptance of installation
b. Loop testing as outlined in Specification 17905
c. CSI requirements at outlined in Specification 17012
d. Leakage testing and approval
e. Tests outlined in Specification 01650
d) System Test – Testing Plan shall include information necessary sequencing as
defined in Specification 01650.
e) Training of Plant Personnel – Training shall be as outlined in Specification 01650.
09/22/15
Special Conditions
01150-7
2992/60270
f) Plant Startup Performance Testing - Requirements for plant startup performance
including the duration and requirements as defined in Section 01650.
3. The Test Plan Schedule shall be submitted 30 days prior to start up of any equipment.
SC 12 - SAFETY AND PROTECTION
In addition to the published safety rules and practices of the Authority, if any, applicable to
activities at the work site the Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations, and orders of public bodies having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property
or to protect them from damage, injury or loss, including, without limitation, the Department of
Labor Safety and Health Regulations for construction promulgated under the Occupational Safety
and Health Act of l970 (PL 91-596), as amended, and under Section 107 of the Contract Work
Hours and Safety Standards Act (PL 91-54) and the Labor Laws of the State within which the
project is located and the codes, rules and regulations promulgated therewith. The Contractor
shall erect and maintain as required by the conditions and the progress of the Work, all necessary
safeguards for safety and protection and shall comply with all applicable recommendations of the
Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction of the Associated General Contractors of
America, Inc.
In compliance with the foregoing the Contractor shall have on site while any work is being
performed an appropriately trained, responsible member of its organization whose duty shall be
compliance with the above referenced laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders and the
prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise
designated in advance in writing by the Contractor to the Authority.
The Contractor shall be responsible for developing, adopting and enforcing a project specific
health and safety plan. The Contractor may not use any health and safety plan provided by
Authority or Engineer as a substitute for conducting a full independent analysis of the materials,
substances, equipment and conditions to be encountered during the project or as part of
Contractor's work. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining and applying the most
current applicable codes, rules, regulations and generally accepted standard of practice for each
element of Contractor's health and safety plan. The Contractor shall not be permitted to rely on
any project health and safety plan provided by Authority or Engineer. The Contractor shall
submit a safety plan, signed by the safety coordinator, for the project that specifically addresses
work in confined spaces. The safety coordinator shall be on-site during those times when work is
conducted within confined spaces.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing to all its employees, agents and subcontractors
or any other person under its control all safety equipment including but not limited to, hard hats,
safety helmets, safety eye wear, respirators, and protective clothing required by law and the
project specific health and safety plan, and shall be responsible for insuring the proper use
thereof.
The Contractor shall place a post adjacent to the principal entry point into each excavation.
Following each inspection of the excavation as required by 29 CFR 1926 (Subpart P) the
Contractor shall prominently post in a manner protected from loss or damage by weather or other
conditions, a certification of inspection. Such certification shall be 8" x 11" and shall be headed
"Excavation Safety Inspection" and shall set forth in letters and figures at least 2 inches high and
¼-inch in thickness the time and date of the last inspection of the excavation. The certification
09/02/15
Special Conditions
01150-8
2992/60270
shall also state that no evidence was found on inspection of: 1) a situation that could result in
possible cave-ins, 2) indication of failure of protective systems, 3) hazardous atmospheres, or 4)
other hazardous conditions. The certification shall be signed by a competent person (as defined
in 29 CFR 1926.650).
The duties, responsibilities and liability of the Contractor as set forth herein shall be deemed
incorporated in and applicable to each and every separate division, section and provision of the
Contract Documents as if set fort fully therein.
The Contractor shall keep upon the Site, at each location where Work is in progress, a completely
equipped first-aid kit and stretcher and shall provide ready access thereto at all times when
personnel are employed on the Work.
The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency, and adequacy of their plant,
appliances and methods.
SC 13 - BORINGS AND OTHER SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
NOT USED.
SC 14 - SITE CONDITIONS AND CONDITIONS OF WORK
The Contractor assumes all risk as to the nature and behavior of the soil or subsurface conditions
encountered during construction. Difficulties that may be due to any unfavorable conditions
encountered in the work are the responsibility of the contractor. No difficulties encountered in
the execution of the work will be accepted as a basis for any claim whatsoever.
Insofar as possible, the Contractor, in carrying out their work must employ such methods or
means as will not cause interruption of or interference with the work of the Authority or any
separate Contractor.
The cost of all excavation required under this Contract will be merged into the base bid. No
distinction will be made insofar as payment is concerned between earth and rock.
As the Work progresses, the Contractor shall remove all unused materials, tools, equipment and
machinery, waste materials, rubbish, refuse, dust and other debris from the site and see to it that
the site is at all times left in a neat and orderly condition. Airborne dust from demolition
operations shall be kept to a minimum to minimize possible damage to existing equipment. The
Contractor shall provide a means to control dust and shall keep existing and new equipment clean
throughout the duration of the project. If the site is not kept in a neat and orderly condition to the
satisfaction of the Engineer or Authority, the Engineer or Authority will order the Contractor to
stop all Work until such order is withdrawn. Issuance of such an order shall not relieve the
Contractor from meeting the scheduled completion date of the work as outlined in the project
schedule. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with maintaining the site in
a neat and orderly condition.
09/02/15
Special Conditions
01150-9
2992/60270
SC 15 - SEDIMENT AND EROSION CONTROL
Work under this contract shall be that work shown on drawings. In addition, silt fence shall be
placed to protect all areas of disturbance on the site. The silt fence shall be included in the base
bid for the project.
SC 16 - RODENT AND PEST CONTROL
The Contractor shall at all times keep the work area, including the storage areas, free from
rodents, noxious pests, and other vermin.
The Authority or the Engineer shall notify the Contractor on any non-compliance with this
requirement and of the corrective action required. This notice, when delivered to the Contractor
or the Contractor's representative at the site of the work, shall be deemed sufficient notice of the
non-compliance and the corrective action required. After receiving the notice, the Contractor
shall immediately take corrective action. If the Contractor fails or refuses to eliminate the
rodents, pests or vermin and the causes thereof promptly, the Authority may have the necessary
extermination work performed and charge the cost to the Contractor.
SC 17 - CONSTRUCTION STAKEOUT
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the construction stake-out for all buildings,
miscellaneous structures, utilities and appurtenances for this project. The Plans indicate the
benchmarks and coordinates used in the design of the project.
From the information provided by the Engineer, the Contractor shall verify bench marks and
develop and make all detail surveys needed for construction.
The Contractor shall set and maintain all necessary intermediate points, lines, grades and
elevations, and provide slope stakes, offset stakes, batter boards, stakes for pipe locations, and
other such items at their own expense. Where the Contractor uses the laser for control, the
Contractor shall periodically check the grade and alignment during each day's operation.
The accuracy of the Contractor's survey and other required data is the sole responsibility of the
Contractor, and the furnishing of data to the Engineer does not constitute a transferal of
responsibility for checking
SC 18 - PROJECT PHOTOGRAPHS
The project sponsor shall obtain photographs of existing conditions prior to the start of site and
access clearing and construction. The Contractor shall provide both progress and site photographs
of the project site as follows:
Site Photos – The Contractor shall obtain site photos before and after construction. An
experienced commercial photographer is not required to obtain the site photos for the project.
Electronic format of these pictures shall be provided to the Authority. A minimum of 25 preconstruction and 25 post-construction photographs shall be provided to the Authority and are
intended to illustrate improvements to the plant. Specific attention shall be given to existing
curbing, sidewalks, and monuments in the vicinity of the proposed construction in the contract
area prior to construction.
09/02/15
Special Conditions
01150-10
2992/60270
Broken or disturbed curbing, sidewalks, and monuments in the vicinity of the work not so
recorded by photographs shall be assumed to have been broken or disturbed by the Contractor
and shall be replaced at their expense prior to acceptance of the job.
Progress Photos - Progress photographs taken using a digital camera shall also be submitted on a
monthly basis on a CD throughout the project duration to the Authority in digital “jpg” format.
The photos shall be appropriately named as follows: Subject.date.jpg.
(ie… Wall
Construction.3.3.2015.jpg). A minimum of twenty four (24) progress photographs shall be taken
once a month during the progress of the work and at the direction of the Resident Engineer.
Special views shall be taken of unusual conditions at the direction of the Resident Engineer in
addition to the regular views in order to document the reason for relocation of lines or restoration
considerations.
The Resident Engineer/Inspector may direct additional photographs to be taken if conditions are
such that those photographs are not sufficient to show special details and conditions.
At the Resident Engineer/Inspectors discretion, they may direct the manner, method, and units of
materials and construction to be photographed. The Contractor shall notify the Resident
Engineer/Inspector not less than 24 hours in advance before pictures are taken. It is the intent and
purpose of the photographs to show the preconstruction conditions, the construction progress, and
the completed post-construction view of the entire project. The Resident Engineer/Inspector will
rely on these photographs to evaluate any insurance or restoration claim.
SC 19 - PRECONSTRUCTION VIDEO TAPING
NOT USED.
SC 20 - ACCESS LIMITATIONS
The Contractor shall visit the site to understand the physical limitations to transporting materials
and equipment within the plant and the raw water distribution wet well. Work includes
transporting equipment and materials in and out of an existing 2’x3’ roof access hatch into the
raw water distribution wet well and through existing 6’x5’ and 2’x5’ roof access hatches to
perform work on the reservoir water main. Construction drawings for the existing plant and
construction plans for subsequent improvements can be reviewed upon request by the Contractor.
The dimensions on these plans are nominal and shall be verified by the Contractor. No structural
modifications to the existing structures will be allowed to transport material and equipment in and
out of the work area without written approval of the Authority. Should modifications be allowed,
Contractor shall restore all affected areas to original conditions at no extra cost to the Authority.
Existing stationary lifting devices may be used by the contractor with permission from the
Authority. All work shall follow applicable OSHA regulations.
SC 21 - AUTHORITY’S RIGHT TO EXISTING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
All existing material and equipment required to be removed, replaced, or demolished under this
contract shall become the property and responsibility of the Contractor and may be salvaged at
their discretion, with the exception of items listed in the Section, entitled “Demolition” which
shall remain in the Authority's property and at no additional cost to the contract
09/02/15
Special Conditions
01150-11
2992/60270
SC 22 - WATER PRIVILAGES
Where the public water supply is available and under control of the Authority, it will be furnished
to the Contractor. Such water supply shall be subject at all times to the control and supervision of
Authority. Prior to making use of any water, permission in writing to use the water for any
particular purpose shall be obtained from the Authority.
SC 23 - MAINTAINING FLOW OF SEWERS, WATERLINES AND DRAINS
The Contractor shall, provide for and maintain the flow of all sewers, drains, inlet connections,
and water courses which may be met with during the progress of the Work. The Contractor shall
not allow the contents of any sewer, drain, or inlet connection to flow into trenches, sewers, or
other structures to be constructed under the Contract, and shall at their expense, immediately
remove and cart away from the vicinity of the Work all offensive matter.
The Contractor shall, at their expense, provide for and maintain the flow in all water mains or
laterals which may be met with during the progress of the Work except as noted in the contract
documents. When water mains or laterals are to be disturbed to the extent that the water will be
shut off, the Authority shall be notified in advance concerning time and duration of the shut-off
period. In cases involving fire hydrants, the fire department shall be so notified.
In the case of an accidental breaking of a water line, the repairs of such break shall have priority
over all other operations. The parties whose services are affected by the break shall be notified at
once and all assistance given to supply emergency water where necessary by temporary lines,
tank truck, or other means. The Contractor shall have the obligation at their expense to assure
that all water, gas and sewer connections serving private or public property shall be promptly and
correctly restored.
SC 24 - EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
The Contractor shall have on hand sufficient proper equipment and machinery of ample capacity
to facilitate the Work.
The Contractor shall furnish, install, and protect all necessary concrete pads, which shall include
guides, track rails, bearing plates, anchor and attachment bolts, and all other appurtenances
needed for the installation of the devices included in the equipment specified. The location, size
and templates for the concrete pads shall be furnished by the Contractor supplying the equipment
along with all guides, track rails, bearing plates, anchor and attachment bolts and other
appurtenances required.
Anchor bolts shall be made of ample size and strength for the purpose intended. Unless otherwise
specified, anchor bolts in submerged locations shall be bronze or stainless steel; all other anchor
bolts shall be cadmium plated. Substantial templates and working drawings for installation shall
be furnished.
All equipment shall be correctly aligned, leveled and adjusted for satisfactory operation and shall
be installed so that proper and necessary connections can be made readily between the various
units.
The Contractor shall furnish all oils and greases for initial operation of each item of equipment
and shall furnish the lubricant chart as indicated in the Special Provision entitled "Lubrication
09/02/15
Special Conditions
01150-12
2992/60270
Chart and Lubrication". Insofar as possible, all lubricants shall be obtained from one
manufacturer approved by the Authority. Each item of equipment shall be tagged to show the
date lubricated, the name and type of lubricant used and the recommended frequency of
lubrication.
All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be checked for correctness of installation by a qualified representative of the manufacturer, and the manufacturer shall certify in writing to the
Engineer that the equipment was installed according to the specifications. Where multiple
manufacturers have supplied components for a piece of equipment, the manufacturer that
assembled the components shall supply the certification.
SC 25 - SHOP DRAWINGS
All shop drawing submissions to the Engineer shall be made electronically in Adobe acrobat
format. In the event electronic submission is not feasible, 3 copies shall be submitted to the
Engineer for review. One reviewed copy will be returned to the Contractor. Contractor shall be
responsible for all costs, including review by the Engineer, incurred by the Authority for shop
drawing reviews beyond the second submittal. Hard copies of all shop drawings shall be
maintained in the Contractor’s on-site project office.
Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall provide 2-hard copies of all approved shop
drawings to the Authority. These shop drawings shall be placed in 3-ring binders and
appropriately labeled on the spine of the binder. Shop drawings shall be placed in CSI order as
found in the Project Specifications.
When submitted for the Engineer's review, shop drawings shall bear the Contractor's certification
that they have reviewed checked and approved the shop drawings and that they are in
conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. By approving and submitting
shop drawings, the Contractor represents that they have determined and verified all field
measurements and quantities, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar
data, and that they have reviewed and coordinated the information in the shop drawings with
requirements of the work and the Contract Documents. Upon signature of a CAD Waiver form
provided at the time of Notice-To-Proceed, the Contractor, will be provided access to project
AutoCAD drawings for use with shop drawing development.
The Engineer's review of the Contractor's shop drawings shall be considered as a service given as
assistance to the Contractor in interpreting the requirements of the contract and in no way shall it
relieve the Contractor of any of their responsibilities under the contract. Any fabrication,
erection, setting or other work done in advance of the receipt of approved shop drawings returned
by the Engineer shall be entirely at the Contractor's risk. The Engineer's review will be confined
to general arrangement and compliance with the contract plans and specifications only and will
not be for the purpose of checking dimensions, weights, clearances, fittings, tolerances,
interferences or coordination of trades. Shop drawings submitted by Subcontractors shall be sent
directly to the Contractor for approval. The Contractor shall be responsible for submission to the
Authority. The Contractor shall check thoroughly all Subcontractor shop drawings in regard to
measurements, sizes of members, materials, and details, to confirm that they conform to the
contract plans and specifications. Drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise in error shall be
returned to the Subcontractor by the Contractor for correction before submitting them to the
Authority and the Engineer. All details on shop drawings submitted for review shall clearly show
the relation of the various parts, and where the work depends upon field measurements, such
09/02/15
Special Conditions
01150-13
2992/60270
measurements shall be obtained by the Contractor and noted on shop drawings before being
submitted for review.
Sufficient space on the shop drawings near the title box should be provided for stamps and review
comments. The shop drawings shall bear the initials of the detailer's checker prior to submission.
All dimensional coordination shall be done by the Contractor.
All submissions shall be properly referenced to indicate clearly the specification section, location,
service and function of each particular item. All submissions for one item or group of related
items shall be complete. Where manufacturer's publications in the form of catalogs, pamphlets,
or other data sheets are submitted in lieu of prepared shop drawings, such submissions shall
specifically indicate the item for which review is requested, and those not applicable shall be
crossed out. Identification of items shall be made in ink and submissions showing only general
information are not acceptable.
If the shop drawings contain any departures from the contract requirements, specific mention
thereof shall be made in the Contractor's letter of transmittal. Where such departures require
revisions to layouts or structural changes to the work as shown, the Contractor shall prepare and
submit revised layout drawings for review at their own expense. Revision drawings shall include
design calculations prepared by a professional engineer. Such drawings shall be the same size as
the contract drawings unless specified otherwise.
The Contractor shall coordinate all reviewed equipment shop drawings with shop drawings of
related new and altered structures, supports, piping, electrical and mechanical work to insure
proper accommodation of the furnished equipment. Shop drawings for structures, supports,
piping, electrical and mechanical work, which are contingent upon the specific equipment
furnished, shall not be submitted until the equipment shop drawings have received final
acceptance.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the prompt submission of all shop or working drawings,
so that there shall be no delay to the work due the absence of such drawings.
SC 26 - MODEL NUMBERS FOR EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND SYSTEMS
Model or series numbers listed for a particular piece of equipment, material or system establishes
minimum standards for operation and quality. Additional requirements and standards maybe
defined by the Specifications, and furnishing the listed model or series does not relieve the
Contractor or Manufacturer from the responsibility of satisfying all requirements and standards
set forth in the Specifications.
SC 27 - MANUFACTURERS
All equipment shall be furnished by manufacturers who shall have at least three years' experience
in the design, production, assembly, and field service of equipment of like type, size, and
capacity, unless a greater amount of experience is required by individual specifications in the
Contract Documents. Where required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall supply a list of at
least three (3) successful installations.
SC 28 - TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated, furnish with each type, kind, and size of equipment,
one complete set of any special tools and appliances which may be needed to adjust, operate,
maintain, or repair the equipment.
09/02/15
Special Conditions
01150-14
2992/60270
Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate, which is securely
fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name, year of manufacture, and
principal rating data.
Where the Specifications require spare parts to be furnished by the Contractor, said spare parts for
each item of equipment shall be kept separate and tagged to identify the specific item of
equipment to which they belong, shall be packaged so as to preclude damage from handling and
storage, and shall be bagged or packaged together where items are small in dimension.
SC 29 - STORAGE AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT
Equipment containing moving parts or bearings which is subject to damage by exposure or
improper storage shall be protected as set forth herein:
The Contractor shall require that the manufacturers of all equipment to be incorporated into the
Work of this Contract supply detailed instructions concerning storage and maintenance required
to maintain the equipment in good condition until it is placed in operation. These instructions
shall be acceptable to the Engineer and shall be strictly enforced. Such acceptance shall not
relieve the Contractor of their obligation to properly store and maintain the equipment.
Equipment which is intended for outdoor installation may be stored outside subject to and in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Equipment intended for indoor installation shall
be stored in heated and ventilated warehouses or in heated and ventilated enclosures on the Site of
the Work.
Equipment which is installed more than seven days prior to being placed in operation shall be
protected in strict accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and in a manner
acceptable to the Engineer. Such protection, where dictated, shall consist of complete air-tight
encapsulation with desiccants.
Equipment improperly stored or improperly protected after installation shall, at the Authority's
option, be replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Authority.
SC 30 - LUBRICATION CHART AND LUBRICATION
The Contractor shall furnish the Authority a lubrication chart(s) for all equipment furnished or
installed under their contract. The chart(s) shall include the following for each item of
equipment:




name of the item;
location of the item;
each point of lubrication on the item;
for each point of lubrication, the identification of the lubricant recommended and the
recommended frequency of lubrication.
The information on the chart(s) shall be developed from manufacturers' printed data or from
manufacturers' specific recommendations.
09/02/15
Special Conditions
01150-15
2992/60270
The identification of the lubricant by manufacturer's name and product identification number
(such as Mobil X421) shall be furnished. The name of the proposed manufacturer to be used
shall be furnished by the Contractor for approval by the Authority.
Following the initial operation of the equipment the Contractor shall re-lubricate, changing and
adding lubricants, at the intervals or frequency as recommended by the manufacturer until
acceptance.
SC 31 - POWER, FUEL & WATER FOR TESTING
The permanent electrical service, or any part thereof, shall not be connected until the tests on
wiring and grounding systems have been successfully completed and test data reviewed by the
Engineer.
Where tests on equipment require electric power for testing, such power shall be supplied through
the permanent electrical service and through the permanent electrical distribution and control
equipment. All power for testing will be provided by the Authority. The use by the Authority of
the permanent electrical service, electrical distribution system, and/or control equipment for the
purpose of testing shall not constitute acceptance of the Work.
Where tests are specified on fuel-burning equipment, or where tests are specified on other
equipment, and require simultaneous operation of the fuel burning equipment, all fuel for such
tests will be provided by the Authority.
Unless otherwise specified, water of acceptable quality for testing shall be furnished by the
Authority. This shall be for one test. Should subsequent tests be required, the Contractor will be
charged for water at the current prevailing rate of the Authority.
SC 32 - AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
During the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep a careful record at the jobsite of all
changes and deviations from the layouts shown on the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall
record such changes and deviations on the prints of the Contract Drawings immediately in RED
ink. The as-built drawings shall indicate, in addition to any changes or deviations, the actual
location referenced from at least two (2) permanently fixed surface structures of all sub-surface
utilities of work installed by them. Any RFI’s or Design Revisions made during the construction
process shall be neatly affixed to the drawing set by taping them directly to the sheet or the back
of the previous drawing page in the set. These drawings will be made available to the Engineer
for inspection or checking at any time during the construction period. At the time of substantial
completion of the work the Contractor shall turn over to the Engineer one set of clean white prints
of the Contract Drawings with all the aforementioned as-built information neatly recorded
thereon in RED ink.
Monthly payment will be withheld if the as-built drawings are not current.
reviewed prior to payment on a monthly basis.
Drawings will be
The Contractor may choose to keep a Digital Copy of the as-built drawings available to the
engineer. Upon signature of a CAD Waiver form provided at Notice to Proceed, the Contractor,
will be provided access to project AutoCAD drawings for use with shop drawings or as-built
09/02/15
Special Conditions
01150-16
2992/60270
work. All changes to the documents must be noted on a separate “Construction” layer in
AutoCAD and noted in a RED line color.
SC 33 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Submit two final (2) copies of all manufacturer’s operation and maintenance manuals and data
pertinent to equipment supplied for the plant. These manuals are in addition to the individual
operation and maintenance manuals submitted with each final shop drawing submittal. Prepare
and organize the material in three-ring binders with divider tabs and labels.
The Contractor shall provide the Authority with an Operation and Maintenance Manual prior to
pre-final inspection/testing.
1.
Manual Preparation
(1)
Manuals shall include operation and maintenance information on all systems and items of
equipment. The following data shall also be included as a minimum:
a.
Title page giving name and location of facility.
b.
List of equipment furnished for project with name, address, and telephone number of
vendor.
c.
List of serial numbers.
d.
Performance curves for all pumps and equipment.
e.
Approved Shop Drawings corrected to as-built conditions and assembly drawings of each
piece of equipment.
f.
Manufacturers’ cuts and dimension drawings of each piece of equipment, and details of
all replacement parts.
g.
Manufacturers’ erection, operation, maintenance and lubrication instructions for all
equipment and apparatus, including lubrication chart and schedules showing manufacturer
recommended lubrications for each rotating or reciprocating unit, and other information necessary
for the County to establish an effective operating and maintenance program.
h.
Complete listing of nameplate data.
i.
Tabulation of motor nameplate horsepower, nameplate current, field-measured current,
overload relay setting, and catalog number.
j.
Complete wiring diagrams of all individual pieces of equipment and systems including
one line diagrams, schematic or elementary diagrams, and interconnection and terminal board
identification diagrams.
k.
Complete pipe and interconnecting drawings.
l.
Complete parts list with parts assembly drawing (preferably by exploded view), names
and addresses of spare parts suppliers, recommended list of spare parts to be kept in stock and
sample order forms for ordering spare parts. Lead time required for ordering parts shall be
estimated.
m.
Instructions with easily understood schematics or diagrams for disassembling and
assembling the equipment for overhaul or repair.
n.
The Contractor shall complete the Equipment File Maintenance Form for each piece of
equipment furnished under the Contract. This form shall be included in the Operations and
Maintenance Manual at the proper place.
o.
Information within the manuals shall be clearly labeled to identify components applicable
to the project. Non-applicable information shall be neatly crossed-out within the manuals.
09/02/15
Special Conditions
01150-17
2992/60270
(2) All items listed above that are of a sheet size of 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches or can be folded (no more than twice) to this size shall be
bound in loose-leaf three-ring type binders with black plastic-coated or blue canvas covers. The contents shall be fully indexed.
(3)
Shop Drawings 24 inches by 36 inches in size shall be folded to approximately 12 inches
by 9 inches with drawing title box exposed along either edge. Shop Drawings descriptive of a
single item of equipment shall be grouped together. All Shop Drawings shall be placed in sheet
protectors (9-1/2 inches x 14-3/4 inches).
(4)
All Shop Drawings included in the binders and/or folders shall be those copies previously
submitted for review and approval and shall bear the Engineer’s stamp of approval and comments
as originally noted thereon.
(5)
Approval
a.
Subsequent to the Engineer’s approval of the final manual, the Contractor shall submit three (3) complete hard copy sets of each
manual for distribution and review by the Engineer in draft format with a CD of the manual in Adobe format. After addressing all elements,
the six (6) final manuals shall be submitted.
b.
Acceptance or beneficial occupancy will positively not be undertaken until approved
Operation and Maintenance Manuals have been submitted. Partial approvals of the final manual
will not be made.
c.
Delivery of manufacturers’ service (O&M) manuals and installation instruction
satisfactory to the Engineer are an essential part of the equipment delivery and prerequisite to
approval of final payment on the delivery of that equipment. Incomplete or inadequate manuals
will be returned to the Contractor for correction and/or resubmission.
(6)
Electronic O&M Manual
The Contractor shall provide two (2) copies of the final approved O&M manuals in electronic
format. The O&M Manuals shall be made available on CD’s accessible through a standard CD
ROM drive
SC 34 - MESUREMENT AND PAYMENT
1.
Measurement of quantities of work will be as indicated on the accepted schedule of
values.
2.
Payment for the quantities of work indicated in the accepted schedule of values will be at
the prices stipulated and approved, not to exceed the lump sum, price bid and shall fully
compensate the Contractor for furnishing all material, labor, equipment, services, tools and all
else incidental and necessary to complete the work.
3.
Materials and equipment delivered but not incorporated in the work.
a.
Measurement for payment will be subject to the following conditions being met or
satisfied:
(1)
copies of delivery tickets shall be submitted to the RPI at the time of delivery to the
storage area in order to permit inventory of materials and/or equipment.
09/02/15
Special Conditions
01150-18
2992/60270
(2)
an invoice from the supplier shall be furnished to the RPI for each item for which
payment is requested.
(3)
certificate of insurance in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the replacement
value of materials and equipment shall be submitted in conformance with the applicable
provisions of the sections "bonds and insurance" and "Contractors responsibilities" of the general
conditions covering the stored materials and equipment. Material shall be identified on the
insurance certificate and the storage location shall be indicated.
(4)
the materials and/or equipment shall be received in a condition satisfactory for
incorporation in the work.
(5)
the materials and/or equipment shall be stored in such a manner that they will not be
damaged due to weather, construction operations, or any other cause.
(6)
the Contractor shall furnish written proof from the supplier for ninety percent (90%)
payment for the materials and/or equipment not later than thirty (30) days after receipt of
payment for same from the Authority. The Authority shall have the right to deduct from the next
payment estimate an amount equal to the payment for said material and/or equipment if
reasonable and adequate proof is not submitted.
SC 35 - FINAL CLEANING UP
Before final contract acceptance by the Authority, the Contractor shall remove from the site all
equipment, temporary work, unused and useless materials, rubbish and temporary buildings, shall
repair or replace in an acceptable manner fences or other private or public property which may
have been damaged or destroyed on account of the prosecution of the work, shall fill all
depressions and water pockets on public and private property caused by their construction
operations, shall clean all drains and ditches within and adjacent to the site which have been
obstructed by construction operations, and shall leave the site and adjacent public and private
property in a neat and presentable condition wherever their construction operations have
disturbed conditions existing at the time of starting work. The Contractor shall procure and
submit to the Authority signed statements from property Authority’s affected that they have
fulfilled their obligation in the matters enumerated above with regard to their respective
properties.
If a dispute arises between Contractor and others as to their responsibility for cleaning up, the
Resident Engineer/Inspector shall determine who shall be responsible.
If the Contractor fails to clean up, the Resident Engineer/Inspector may have the cleaning done
independently with the cost of same to be borne by that Contractor.
Final Inspection
Prior to making the final payment, and at a time mutually agreeable to the Authority, the
Engineer, the Resident Engineer/Inspector, and the Contractor, they will make a final inspection
of the work. All deficiencies noted by the Authority/Resident Engineer/Inspector at the time of
this inspection shall be corrected by the Contractor before the Authority will authorize final
payment.
Startup
The Contractor shall assume the final responsibility for starting up and placing in operation,
acceptable to the Resident Engineer/Inspector, all equipment that the Contractor has installed.
09/02/15
Special Conditions
01150-19
2992/60270
The Contractor shall be responsible, once all individual equipment items or systems have been
accepted, for placing all process units in operation to insure a fully-integrated process.
*************
09/02/15
Special Conditions
Page Intentionally Left Blank
01300-1
2992/60270
SECTION 01300
CPM CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
1.03
A.
1.04
WORK INCLUDED
This section specifies requirements and procedures in preparing and updating construction
schedules and reports for planning, coordinating, executing, and monitoring the progress of the
work. The construction work shall be scheduled using the Critical Path Method (CPM) of network
analysis.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
Section 01150 Special Conditions
FORM OF SCHEDULES
Prepare schedules in the form of critical path method (CPM) as described herein.
1.
Provide separate CPM networks (sub-networks) of activities for each process or facility.
2.
Each sub-network shall be assigned a code and separate activity numbering series.
3.
Interrelationships between sub-networks and any individual activities shall be identified.
SCHEDULING RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
The Critical Path Method type construction schedule will be used to monitor job progress and as a
means to make monthly payments to Contractor. Contractor will be responsible for providing all
information concerning the sequencing, logic and durations of all activities as well as providing the
initial logic network diagram. Once the schedule is accepted, Contractor will be responsible for
providing monthly updates to the logic, percent complete, actual start and finish dates and duration
changes. Contractor will be required to produce paper copies of the updated schedule and
electronic files of the schedule on a monthly basis as noted below. Copies of the updated schedule
shall be distributed at the progress meetings.
B.
Each monthly schedule update shall highlight the changes from the previous month and specifically
show what has changed.
C.
It should be clearly understood that the initial schedule and all updates are a representation of the
best efforts of the Contractor and their subcontractors as to how they envision the work to be
accomplished. Similarly, all progress information to be provided by and through Contractor must
be an accurate representation of the subcontractors, suppliers, and their actual performance. The
schedule shall at all times remain an accurate reflection of Contractor's actual or projected
sequencing of work. Once accepted, adherence to the established CPM schedule shall be obligatory
upon Contractor and their subcontractors for the work under this Contract. Authority may require
Contractor to revise the schedule if, in his/her judgment, the schedule does not accurately reflect the
09/02/15
CPM Construction Schedule
01300-2
2992/60270
actual execution of the work, or is in violation of any provision of this CPM scheduling
specification, and Contractor shall revise the schedule as often as is necessary during the course of
performance of the work without additional cost to Authority.
1.06
PROGRESS OF THE WORK
A.
The work shall be started on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed and shall be executed with
such progress as may be required to prevent delay to other Contractors or to the general completion
of the project. The work shall be executed at such times and in or on such parts of the project, and
with such forces, material and equipment, as to assure completion of the work in the time
established by the Contract. Additionally, Contractor shall, at all times, schedule and direct the
work so that it provides an orderly progression to completion within the specified Contract Time.
B.
Contractor agrees that whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly CPM Schedule
update that delays to the critical path have resulted and these delays are through no fault of
Authority or Authority's representatives, and hence, that the Contract completion date will not be
met, or when so directed by Authority he will take some or all of the following actions at no
additional cost to Authority.
C.
1.
Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will substantially eliminate
the backlog of work that is causing the negative float in the critical path activities.
2.
Increase the number of working hours per shift; shifts per working day, or days per week;
the amount of construction equipment; etc., or any combination of the foregoing to
substantially eliminate the backlog of work that is causing negative float in the critical path
activities.
3.
Schedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrence of accomplishment of
activities, and comply with the revised schedule.
4.
Contractor shall submit for review a written statement of the steps he intends to take to
remove or arrest the delay to the schedule. If Contractor fails to submit a written statement
of the steps he intends to take or fails to take such steps as required by the Contract,
Authority may direct the level of effort in manpower (trades), equipment, and work
schedule (overtime) to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the accepted
schedule, and Contractor shall promptly provide such level of effort at no additional cost to
Authority. In addition, should schedule delays persist, Authority may exercise the right to
take over the work.
Failure of Contractor to comply with the requirements of this provision shall subject him to, at
Authority's sole discretion, withholding, in partial or in total, payments otherwise due Contractor for
work performed under this Contract in accordance with Article 8.4 of the General Conditions.
Contractor agrees that any withholding of moneys is not a penalty for noncompliance, but is an
assurance for Authority that funds will be available to implement these requirements should
Contractor fail to do so, since failure of Contractor to comply with these requirements shall mean
that Contractor failed to execute the work with such diligence as to ensure its completion within the
time for completion.
PART 2 CPM CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
09/02/15
CPM Construction Schedule
01300-3
2992/60270
2.01
NETWORK REQUIREMENTS
A.
The network diagram shall show the order and interdependence of activities and the sequence in
which the work is to be accomplished as planned by Contractor. The basic concept of the network
analysis diagram is to show how the start of a given activity is dependent on the completion of
preceding activities and its completion restricts the start of succeeding activities. A time scaled
precedence format will be followed. The detailed network diagram will be time scaled showing a
continuous flow from left to right.
B.
The Schedule Activities shall be developed into three major groups:
1.
Procurement Activities (as applicable)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
2.
Permits
Shop Drawing submittals
Approval of Submittal Items
Fabrication and Delivery (F&D) of Submittal Items
Each of the following procurement activities should be tied logically to the correct
construction activity in the overall CPM construction schedule:
(a)
(b)
Permit activities
F&D activities
3.
Construction Activities: Construction activities will be physical work activities that
describe how the job will be constructed.
4
Testing, Startup, Training and Closeout: CPM activities for this group shall include all
work required to satisfy the appropriate specification sections for testing and startup of
equipment, systems, and the plant, and meet the requirements of substantial and final
completion.
C.
Contractor shall break the work into activities durations of one to twenty (1 to 20) working days
each, except for non-construction activities (such as procurement of materials and delivery of
equipment) and other activities that may require longer durations. To the extent feasible, activities
related to a specific physical area of the project should be grouped on the network for ease of
understanding and simplification. The selection and number of activities shall be subject to the
review of the Engineer.
D.
Each activity on the network shall have indicated for it the following:
1.
A single duration, no longer than 20 days (i.e., the single best estimate of the expected
elapsed time considering the scope of work involved in the activity) expressed in working
days. Normal holidays and weather delays shall be included. One critical path shall be
shown for the schedule.
2.
An activity identification number shall be assigned to each activity. The identification
number shall be in a format acceptable to Engineer.
3.
A brief description of the activity shall be included. If this description is not definitive, a
separate listing of each activity and a descriptive narrative may be required.
09/02/15
CPM Construction Schedule
01300-4
2992/60270
E.
The CPM schedule shall include a weather calendar that contains non-working days in addition to
weekend and holidays to account for anticipated inclement weather days. The number of
anticipated inclement weather days per month shall be equal to those which are typical for the
location of the proposed work. The weather calendar shall be applied to all activities, which may be
affected by inclement weather.
F.
Failure to include in the CPM schedule any element of Work required under the performance of this
Contract shall not excuse the Contractor from completing all Work required within the applicable
completion time, notwithstanding Authority's network review.
G.
A CPM schedule which shows a completion of any portion of the Work prior to the contractual
completion date may be accepted but in no event shall be acceptable as a basis for a claim for delay
against Authority by Contractor. The period of time between the Contractor’s baseline accepted
CPM schedule’s projected completion dates and the contractual stipulated completion dates, if any,
will be treated as Project Float. The Authority’s right to utilize Project Float is as provided in
paragraph 4.03 below.
2.02
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Each activity on the construction schedule shall be allocated a dollar value. Each activity's assigned
cost shall consist of labor, equipment, and materials costs, and a pro rata contribution of overhead
and profit. The sum of activities costs shall be equal to the total Contract Price. In submitting cost
data Contractor certifies that the costs are not unbalanced and that the value assigned to each
activity represents Contractor's estimate of the actual costs of performing that activity.
B.
The accepted schedule of values shall represent a fair, reasonable and equitable dollar cost
allocation for each activity on Contractor's construction schedule.
C.
If it is determined that the cost data does not meet the requirements for a balanced bid breakdown in
the opinion of Engineer, Contractor will present documentation substantiating the cost allocation.
Cost allocations shall be considered unbalanced if an activity on the construction schedule has been
assigned a disproportionate allocation of direct costs, overhead and profit.
PART 3 SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS
3.01
CPM SCHEDULE IMPLEMENTATION
A.
Within thirty (30) calendar days after Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall submit an electronic copy
(CD) of the proposed CPM in PDF format including the network diagram and tabular reports for the
entire Contract duration and shall include both procurement and construction activities. These
tabular reports shall be sorted by total float and activity number. They shall also contain a
predecessor/successor resource loading report, and project calendar. This logic diagram shall be
drawn as described herein and will be the subject for review between the Contractor, Authority, and
Resident Engineer at every monthly progress meeting. Contractor shall plan for an additional
meeting to review the initial progress schedule submittal.
B.
If a review of the submitted CPM Schedule indicates a work plan which will not complete the work
within the time requirements stated in the Contract, it shall be the responsibility of Contractor to
revise the CPM Schedule as required and resubmit it until it is acceptable. Failure by Contractor to
submit an acceptable schedule may, at Authority's sole discretion, justify the withholding of any
09/02/15
CPM Construction Schedule
01300-5
2992/60270
partial payment(s) otherwise due under the Contract.
C.
3.02
Acceptance of the schedule shall not constitute a representation by Authority that the work can be
completed as shown on the schedule.
SUBMITTALS AND CLARIFICATIONS
A.
In addition to the above scheduling requirements, Contractor will be required to submit a complete
and detailed listing of anticipated submittals during the course of the Contract. Contractor will
coordinate the submittals with those of their subcontractors and suppliers and will identify each
submittal as specified. The anticipated submission due date for each submittal must be indicated
along with the date on which its return is anticipated. For planning purposes, shop drawing
submittals will usually be returned twenty (20) working days after receipt. However, longer
durations for review will not be considered a basis for a claim. Durations shown for review shall be
understood to share available float. Submissions, the review of which is on the critical path, shall be
clearly marked in red with the words "Critical Path" by Contractor at the time of submission.
B.
The Submittal List shall be submitted within twenty (20) calendar days from the award. The
Submittal Schedule will then be accepted or revised as required and Contractor will incorporate the
dates and review durations into their CPM Schedule.
C.
All Contractor’s request for clarification/Information (RFI) will be responded to within 10 business
days after receipt.
3.03
A.
B.
SCHEDULE UPDATES
Schedule updates will be reviewed at each monthly progress meeting at the construction site to
review and update the CPM Schedule. In addition to the Contractor, attendees at these meetings
shall include the Authority, Engineer, Authority’s Inspector and one or more representatives from
the State. Actual progress of the previous month will be recorded and scheduling of future work
activities will be reviewed. The duration of activities and their logical connections may be revised,
if the proposed revisions are accepted by the Engineer. Contractor must provide the following
information for each update at a minimum:
1.
Actual start and finish dates for all completed activities.
2.
Actual start dates for all started but incomplete activities and estimated remaining
durations.
Provide a Monthly Progress Status Report to be presented at a Monthly Progress meeting, which
provides a narrative explanation of progress identified in the revised construction schedule. The
report shall indicate the following items:
1.
Summarize revisions made to the Construction Schedule since the previous submittal.
2.
Work completed during the reporting period.
3.
Work anticipated to be started during the next period, including those activities already in
progress.
4.
Problem areas, anticipated delays, and their impact on the schedule.
5.
Corrective action recommended, and its effect.
09/02/15
CPM Construction Schedule
01300-6
2992/60270
C.
6.
The effect of changes on schedules of other prime Contractors, if any.
7.
Control system integrator progress and equipment testing status.
8.
Updated tabulation of contract time.
9.
An evaluation of the overall status of the schedule for the job.
10.
Schedule reports to be provided with the monthly report include.
a.
Critical Path Report
b.
Anticipated Work within next month
Failure to provide update information listed in 3.03.A and B above will result in Contractor not
receiving progress payments.
PART 4 CONTRACT COMPLETION TIME
4.01
CAUSES FOR EXTENSIONS OF TIME
A.
Extensions of time will be granted only for causes specified in the “Contract Information”. In the
event Contractor requests an extension of time, he shall furnish justification and supporting
evidence per requests specified in the “Contract Information”. After receipt of such justification and
supporting evidence, Engineer will review the request and make findings of fact and will advise
Contractor in writing thereof. If the Engineer finds that Contractor is entitled to an extension of
time under the provisions of the Contract, Engineer’s determination as to the total number of days to
be granted shall be based upon the current accepted and updated CPM schedule and on all data
relevant to the extension. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that actual delays in activities on the
critical path will be the only basis eligible for an extension in time. Those actual delays that do not
affect any contract completion date shown by the critical path in the network (according to the CPM
schedule), do not have any effect on the contract time, and therefore will not be the basis for an
extension in time.
B.
Contract Time extensions for weather delays will be based only on the following criteria.
1.
General Requirements: Even though a cause of delay meets any, or all, of the conditions
stated herein, it shall in all cases be presumed that no extension of time is due unless
Contractor shall demonstrate that the delay is justified, had an impact to the critical path
of the updated CPM schedule for the delay period, and is in excess of the anticipated
inclement weather days required by the provisions above. To this end, Contractor shall
maintain adequate records supporting any claim for an extension of time and shall submit
such records, including a revised CPM schedule showing the impact of the delay, with
the claim. Claims due to weather shall be submitted on a monthly basis and within five
days after the end of the previous month of such delay.
2.
Engineer will determine Contractor’s entitlement to an extension of time, but in no event
shall an extension be granted for days outside the contract period. The Wall Township
daily records, maintained by Township staff, shall be the official source for weather data
related to precipitation and temperature. A time extension of no more than one day will
be granted for one day of lost work, regardless of the number of allowable reasons for
lost time. The period of any extension of time shall be only for the portion of the contract
09/02/15
CPM Construction Schedule
01300-7
2992/60270
actually delayed due to the abnormal weather conditions. Any extension of time allowed
under adverse weather shall be considered non-compensable and have no impact on
Contract Price.
4.02
A.
4.03
A.
ADJUSTMENT BY AUTHORITY
From time to time it may be necessary for the Contract schedule and/or contract times to be adjusted
by Authority due to the effects of job conditions, acts or omissions of other Contractors not directly
associated with this contract, act of God, technical difficulties, strikes, unavoidable delays on the
part of Authority or their representatives, and other unforeseeable conditions which may indicate
schedule adjustments and/or an extension of time. Under such conditions, Authority shall direct
Contractor to reschedule the work to reflect the changed conditions, and Contractor shall revise
their schedule accordingly. Schedule extensions affecting the contract time shall be granted only by
the Authority in writing. No additional compensation shall be made to Contractor for such
schedule changes except for unavoidable overall Contract delays, in which case Contractor shall
take all possible action to minimize any time extension. Authority, therefore, has the right to
accelerate the schedule and Contractor will be compensated for such acceleration as long as such
acceleration is not required through fault of Contractor. It is specifically noted that available
Project Float in the current updated CPM schedule may be used by the Authority and their
representative, as well as by Contractor.
FLOAT TIME
Without obligation to extend the overall completion date or any intermediate completion dates set
out in the CPM network, Authority may initiate changes to the Contract work that absorb float time.
Authority-initiated changes that affect the critical path on the CPM network shall be the sole
grounds for extending (or shortening) said completion dates. Contractor initiated changes that
encroach on the float time identified in the CPM network may be accomplished with Authority's
concurrence. Such changes, however, shall give way to Authority-initiated changes competing for
the same float time.
********
09/02/15
CPM Construction Schedule
Page Intentionally Left Blank
01505-1
2992/60270
SECTION 01505
MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
Work consists of preparatory work and operations needed to mobilize for the project. Work
Includes:
A.
Movement to, placement and set-up on project site of personnel of any type, equipment,
supplies and accessory items.
B.
Establishment of Contractor offices, buildings and other needed project facilities plus
utility work and connections needed for these facilities.
C.
Scheduling details, coordination and any other work and expense appropriate that is prior
to start of work under other Contract pay items.
D.
Demobilization of above items at completion of project.
Work, however, does not include establishing Engineer’s field facilities or utility work and
connections needed for these facilities.
Any associated work not included above shall be distributed equitably among other pay items.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
None this Section
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
None this Section
2.2
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
None this Section
2.3
MEASURE AND PAYMENT
A.
The unit of measure for mobilization/demobilization will be the job with no actual
measure taken.
B.
Payment for mobilization/demobilization will be made at the lump-sum price included in
the Bid Items.
C.
Payment for Mobilization/Demobilization will be made in two installments.
6/25/2015
Mobilization/Demobilization
01505-2
2992/60270
1.
First payment of 90 percent of lump-sum will be made following mobilization
and completion of five percent of construction work.
2.
Second and Final payment of ten percent of lump-sum will be made after
Contract and demobilization work are complete.
********
6/25/2015
Mobilization/Demobilization
01650-1
2992/60270
SECTION 01650
FACILITY STARTING / TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.
This section includes requirement for providing a field testing program for electrical,
tankage and mechanical equipment which shall be performed, recorded, completed and
approved as indicated.
2.
Procedures outlined in Section 01150 shall apply as indicated.
3.
All test instruments, gauges, meters, and auxiliary equipment shall be provided by the
Contractor and where required, by manufacturers field service personnel. All equipment
used for testing must have been tested and calibrated within 6-months of their use on this
contract. Verification of calibration shall be submitted to the engineer for approval.
4.
The Contractor shall be responsible for supervising and conducting the tests, including
providing all personnel and equipment necessary to communicate test functions between
the workstations and the equipment.
5.
The Contractor shall assume all costs incurred in the event that the equipment fails to
provide satisfactory performance, as determined by the performance tests for equipment
furnished under this Contract. These costs include costs for additional infrared analysis,
additional utilities, etc., for test reruns when such test reruns were caused by faults properly
the responsibility of the Contractor.
6.
Water provided for hydraulic testing will be provided by the Authority.
7.
There are four separate requirements as defined herein for Facility Testing / Startup. These
tests are to be performed sequentially as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Individual Testing Requirements as outlined in Specification 01150.
System Testing
Training Requirements
Performance Testing
8.
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed testing plan that describes testing for each of the
equipment and systems. Each test shall be clearly identified on the Contractor’s work
schedule. Work schedule shall include line items for each piece of equipment and system
that will be tested, and each type of test to be performed. The test plan shall consist of a
detailed, step by step procedure for conducting the test. Test plan shall include quantity
and type of personnel Contractor plans to utilize for conducting tests. The requirements of
this system test shall be incorporated into the Test Plan defined in the Special Conditions.
Tests shall not be scheduled until the test plan has been approved by the Authority
9.
Requests for deviations from the Test Plan submitted in accordance with Specification
01150 shall be shall be submitted in writing to the Authority for approval.
10.
Test Reports - The Contractor shall provide a test report for each test performed during
09/02/15
Facility Testing/Startup
01650-2
2992/60270
each testing phase indicating the date(s) of test, equipment or materials tested, persons
present at testing, and outcome of test, including any defects required to be repaired.
PART 2 – INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT TESTING REQUIREMENTS
1.
Shop Drawings and Operations and Maintenance Manuals - Prior to performing tests, the
Contractor shall have available at the location where testing is to take place one copy of
all shop drawings and Operations and Maintenance manual for equipment being tested.
Shop drawings and O&M Manuals shall be coded either “Reviewed” or “Reviewed and
Noted”. No testing shall commence until such documents have been provided.
2.
Individual Equipment - Tests identified in the technical specifications associated with
individual equipment shall be performed as prerequisites. Before proceeding to System
Testing, all discrepancies and deficiencies observed shall be noted and corrected, and, if
directed by the Engineer, the test of equipment and systems previously found deficient
shall be rescheduled and repeated at no additional cost to the Authority.
3.
Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation - Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation shall
be provided for systems and equipment where specified in individual specification
sections. If a Manufacturer's Certificate is not required for a particular piece of
equipment or system, the Contractor shall confirm in writing to the Engineer that he has
successfully operated or has observed others (manufacturer or duly representative)
successfully operate the piece of equipment or system in all specified modes and through
all cycles required. Manufacturer's Certificates shall state that the equipment has been
installed under either the continuous or periodic supervision of the manufacturer's
authorized representative, that it has been adjusted and initially operated in the presence
of the manufacturer's authorized representative, and that it is operating in accordance
with the specified requirements, to the manufacturer's satisfaction. Equipment provided
as part of a system package from a manufacturer shall be fully tested and confirmation of
specified operation provide by the Manufacturer. Contractor shall furnish 2 copies of
manufacturer provided certificates to Engineer.
4.
Electrical and Instrumentation Documentation
a. Instrumentation Demonstration – Specified in Div. 17 Section “Control System
Integrator”.
b. Intermediate Point to Point I/O Wiring Verification – Specified in Div. 17
Section “Process Control System” This work shall be signed off by the
Electrician. Contractor may not proceed to System Testing without this
signature.
PART 3 - SYSTEM TESTS
1.
Prior to system testing startup activity the contractor shall verify that the individual
equipment has been tested hydraulically, mechanically, and electrically; systems which
require calibration, commissioning, and balancing are fully certified and installed in
accordance with the technical speculations, required tagging and identification is
09/02/15
Facility Testing/Startup
01650-3
2992/60270
complete.
2.
The systems tests are intended to demonstrate operation of the equipment or system
under actual operating conditions, with clean water, for manual and automatic operating
and control modes, as well as demonstrate equipment failures and alarms.
3.
All PLC programming, and programming of the workstation graphic displays associated
with the particular system shall be completed and loaded into the PLC and workstations
prior to commencement of test.
4.
Within the testing plan defined in the Special Conditions, the plan shall identify the
proposed testing sequence of all equipment and hydraulic structures and other required
systems, the order in which they are being tested and the estimated test duration.
5.
Test Requirements
a.
Tests shall include full demonstration of the process control system, including
PLC programming logic and operator interface terminals. Graphic displays on all
workstations shall be demonstrated to be operational, including demonstration of
analog and status displays, alarm displays, and graphical monitoring of
equipment status and analog values.
i.
Final Point-to-Point I/O Wiring and Transmission Verification – Specified
in Div. 17 Section “Process Control System”
b.
All wiring and cabling for process control system connections shall be installed
prior to testing.
c.
General testing requirements for system tests are listed as follows:
09/02/15
i.
Demonstration of operation of each individual piece of equipment in local
manual, or “Hand” mode. Demonstration of graphic displays to indicate
equipment status and multiple valve position (if applicable), and all analog
values for associated process variables. Demonstration that analog values are
accurate based on physical measurements or calibrated test instruments.
Demonstration of low level controls and safety and lockout devices are active
in the local manual mode. Demonstration of alarm indication on graphic
displays.
ii.
Demonstration of the operation of local control panels and local automatic
controls and instruments. Demonstration of alarm indication on graphic
displays.
iii.
Demonstration of automatic control mode for equipment and systems,
including all control functions. Demonstration of remote manual control of
equipment, including starting and stopping of equipment and manual speed
control. Demonstration of loss of signal for analog signals used as process
control variables. Demonstration of failure modes, automatic fail-over of
equipment when one piece of equipment fails, and alarm activation.
Demonstration of all control interlocks. Interlocks between systems will be
Facility Testing/Startup
01650-4
2992/60270
simulated for the purposes of these tests in order to limit the scope of the
particular test to the individual system.
iv.
Demonstration of PID control loops for one, two and three pieces of
equipment in operation. Demonstration of PID loop alarms.
v.
Demonstration of alarm and status on graphic screens. Demonstration of
graphical displays of analog values, and color changes of graphic displays
based on equipment status.
vi.
Demonstration of power outages, operation on emergency power, restoration
of normal power, and resetting of control functions based on return of analog
signals used for process control variables.
vii.
Demonstration of loss of communications between PLC and workstations.
Demonstration of failure of PLC.
d.
Personnel Requirements
The Contractor shall provide the following personnel, as a minimum, to
supervise and run the system tests:
e.
i.
Contractor’s representatives – Must be onsite and available upon request
to make correction as required.
ii.
Control System Integrator – A CSI shall be available at all times to
provide assistance and troubleshooting of process control system during
system testing, to monitor work stations, and to initiate commands from
work stations during system tests. This person shall knowledgeable in all
aspects of the instrumentation, PLC logic, and graphic display program
for the project. This person shall be present at the test location at all
times during the test, and shall be actively engaged in the testing.
iii.
Electrical subcontractor – one representative knowledgeable in the
electrical systems at the facility to be on site at all times during the
system test to provide check-out and troubleshooting capability.
iv.
Contractor shall provide other persons, including manufacturer’s
representatives for equipment and systems that he deems necessary in
order to supervise and run the required tests.
Test Approval
The Engineer shall approve each test prior to allowing the next test to proceed.
Upon request of the Contractor, the Engineer may, at his/her option, give partial
approval for the test if certain portions of the test fail. For partial approvals, the
Contractor shall reschedule and repeat the portions of the test that failed, at no
cost to the Authority, until all portions of the test have been approved by the
Engineer.
09/02/15
Facility Testing/Startup
01650-5
2992/60270
PART 4 – TRAINING OF PLANT OPERATORS
1.
Plant operator and technical training required by the specifications shall be scheduled to
occur only after successful all equipment testing and or system testing. Training shall
occur prior to plant startup and performance period.
2.
The Contractor shall furnish personnel to instruct operators in the correct use and
lubrication of all electrical and mechanical equipment furnished under this Contract. See
individual sections for specific instruction requirements.
3.
The Contractor shall furnish personnel and provide coordination support and start-up of
all electrical and mechanical equipment furnished and additionally be responsible for
coordination support and start-up of the equipment provided by the Authority under this
Contract. See individual sections for specific start-up requirements.
4.
Where training is called for in Specifications, provide competent and experienced
technical representative of Supplier to provide detailed instructions to Authority's
personnel for operation of equipment. Training services shall include maintenance of
instrumentation, maintenance of equipment and operation of instrumentation and
equipment in classroom and on-site as stated in Specifications. Training shall include
electrical, mechanical, and safety aspects of equipment.
5.
Submit documentation identifying name of specific representative, factory authorization,
background of named individual(s) to conduct training, training outline, and training
schedule. Submit information 30 calendar days before scheduled training period for
review and approval by Engineer. Training shall not start until system is on-line and
operational, and all final O&M manuals have been approved by the Engineer.
6.
Coordinate training periods with Engineer and supplier's representatives.
a.
No training shall be conducted unless instructor has been approved by the
Engineer.
b.
Notify the Engineer at least 5 calendar days before training sessions are to begin
so Engineer can make arrangements with Authority's operating personnel.
c.
Failure to arrive on time will be reimbursed by actual time late up to 1 hour. If
the supplier's or manufacturer's representative is later than 1 hour, training will be
rescheduled.
7.
Similar types of equipment differing in model, size or manufacturer shall require equal
service time as stated in specific Specification section.
8.
O&M data shall constitute basis of instruction and shall be submitted and approved 10
calendar days prior to the training session.
a.
09/02/15
Review data contents with personnel in full detail to explain aspects of
operations and maintenance.
Facility Testing/Startup
01650-6
2992/60270
9.
Provide "Certificates of Instructional Services," cosigned by Authority and supplier's
representative, verifying training accomplished to satisfaction of all parties. Contractor
shall furnish 2 copies of certificates to Engineer.
10.
The Authority reserves the right to video record all training sessions involving the
Authority’s operations staff during the training periods conducted by the equipment
manufacturer as specified in the Contract Documents. Videotapes of these training
sessions will be used for the sole purpose of training and educating the Authority’s
operations staff
PART 5 - STARTUP PERFORMANCE PERIOD
1.
Upon successful completion of all the System Tests, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer no less than 10 calendar days in advance of proposed startup time. The Startup
Performance Period (Performance Period) will serve as the final performance of the
Work installed under this Contract, demonstrating to the Authority and Engineer that all
Work installed is functioning as intended and as an integral system under actual water
treatment conditions.
2.
The Performance Period shall be four (4) weeks. The Contractor’s field supervisor shall
be available on site at all times during the first week of the Performance Period, during
normal working hours. If at any time the system is impacted by an equipment,
instrumentation, or communication failure, the performance period shall cease and repairs
or corrections shall be made by the Contractor. The performance period shall resume
upon satisfactory acceptance of the repair by the Authority. If the repair is completed
within 5 calendar days, the Performance Period will continue to completion. If the repair
takes longer than 5 calendar days, the owner reserves the right to begin the Performance
Test from the beginning.
3.
The Authority will provide operations personnel to operate the facilities during the
performance period. At any time during this period it shall be the Contractor’s sole
responsibility to promptly correct any deficiencies or equipment breakdowns resulting
from the Work performed by the Contractor under this Contract. Should such
deficiencies or breakdowns occur, the Contractor shall provide the necessary qualified
personnel and equipment to correct such work, at no additional cost to the Contract.
Weekly reports developed by the Authority and Engineer will identify punch list items
which shall be completed before Substantial Completion will be considered, even if such
completion work extends beyond the four (4) weeks Performance Period. It shall be
understood that completion of the four (4) weeks Performance Period shall not imply
“Substantial Completion”. Substantial Completion shall be considered only under the
conditions as set forth in the “Contract Information”, Section.
4.
Following the completion of the Startup Performance Period, the Authority’s operations
personnel will continue to operate the plant.
*************
09/02/15
Facility Testing/Startup
02050-1
2992/60270
SECTION 02050
DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for the demolition of
existing structures, equipment, and appurtenances, as shown on the Contract Drawings
and specified herein.
B.
This Section includes all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for the temporary
storage, removal and disposal of all wastes resulting from demolition activities.
REFERENCES
A.
Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following
codes, standards and specifications, except where more stringent requirements have been
specified herein:
1.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
American Standard Testing and Materials (ASTM)
In addition to those submittals identified in the Contract Documents, the following items
shall also be submitted:
1.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and
ending dates for each activity to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner’s on-site
operations.
2.
Interruption of utility services.
3.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4.
Listing of all equipment which will be removed/demolished for approval by the
Engineer.
5.
Listing of all equipment which will be salvaged and returned to the Owner.
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
1.
09/02/15
Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's property (Contractor shall coordinate
with Owner prior to demolition such that Owner might identify any materials that
need to be salvaged), demolished materials shall become the Contractor's
Demolition
02050-2
2992/60270
property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the
Contractor's option.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.
Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to selective
demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so that Owner's operations will
not be disrupted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1.
Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces,
use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
2.
Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing
materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent
of selective demolition required.
C.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the
intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and
extent of the conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Engineer.
D.
Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might
result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or
adjacent structures during selective demolition.
E.
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective
demolition activities.
09/02/15
Demolition
02050-3
2992/60270
3.2
UTILITY SERVICES
A.
Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage
during selective demolition operations.
1.
3.3
a.
Provide not less than 5 working days written notice to Owner if
shutdown of service is required.
b.
No utilities shall be left unattended while open or "hot".
c.
Plug or cap abandoned raceways or conduits. Exposed conduits shall be
removed.
d.
Concealed conduit, junction boxes, and outlet boxes may remain in place
unless otherwise noted.
e.
All existing wiring not reused shall be removed.
ELECTRICAL
A.
3.4
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except
when authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable
to Owner and to governing authorities.
Prior to demolishing equipment with electric motors, controls, lighting, and other
electrical connections, trace existing wiring to its power source, lock out and tag out the
existing power supply source with the Owner, and disconnect and remove all conduit and
wire serving the equipment scheduled for demolition. Cut off concealed conduits an inch
below the surface, and fill and patch the surface to match adjacent materials and finishes.
PREPARATION
A.
09/02/15
Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with
roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by
governing regulations.
2.
Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust
and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
a.
Construct dustproof partitions approved by the Owner.
b.
Insulate partition to provide noise protection to occupied areas.
Demolition
02050-4
2992/60270
B.
c.
Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and
security locks.
d.
Protect air-handling equipment.
e.
Weatherstrip openings.
Pollution Controls
1.
Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the
spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection
regulations.
a.
2.
C.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing
before start of selective demolition.
Selective Demolition
1.
09/02/15
Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create
hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and
pollution.
Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within
limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
a.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions
required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to
remain or adjoining construction. To minimize disturbance of adjacent
surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,
not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
b.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to
avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
c.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable
materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify
condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting
operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flamecutting operations.
d.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
e.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable
materials and promptly dispose of off-site.
Demolition
02050-5
2992/60270
f.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method
suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust
generation.
g.
Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and
remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on
supporting walls, floors, or framing.
h.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or
sale of removed items is prohibited.
i.
Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition
existing before start of selective demolition operations.
2.
Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at
junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven masonry saw or hand
tools; do not use power-driven impact tools.
3.
Remove resilient floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations of
the Resilient Floor Covering Institute's (RFCI) "Recommended Work Practices
for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings" and Addendum.
a.
D.
Patching and Repairs
1.
Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent
construction by selective demolition operations.
2.
Patching is specified in individual specification sections for the applicable items
being demolished.
3.
Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable
for new materials.
4.
09/02/15
Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings
by one of the methods recommended by RFCI.
a.
Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls to
remain with an approved masonry patching material, applied according
to manufacturer's printed recommendations.
b.
Fill depressions at existing floor drains to be removed with concrete
(maintain two hour fire rating and seal against gas penetration).
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into
adjoining construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching
and refinishing.
Demolition
02050-6
2992/60270
5.
6.
E.
Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls
or partitions extend one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even
surface of uniform color and appearance.
a.
Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface.
b.
Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with
specified tolerances.
c.
Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint coat over
entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the surface has
received primer and second coat.
d.
Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new
materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
e.
Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation,
where feasible.
Where cutting into existing face brick is required, salvage, to the extent possible,
face brick for use in patching work.
Disposal of Demolished Materials
1.
General: Demolished material and equipment shall become the property and
responsibility of the Contractor with the specific exception of those items
scheduled to be salvaged. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not
allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
a.
2.
F.
G.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally
dispose of them.
Cleaning
1.
Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation.
2.
Change filters on air-handling equipment on completion of selective demolition
operations.
Security
1.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the security in and around the area
affected by demolition until work is complete, including modifications to the
existing chain link fence.
*****
09/02/15
Demolition
02502-1
2992/60270
SECTION 02502
RESTORATION OF SURFACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes restoration and maintenance of all types of surfaces, sidewalks,
curbs, gutters, culverts and other features disturbed, damaged or destroyed during the
performance of the work under or as a result of the operations of the Contract.
B.
The quality of materials and the performance of work used in the restoration shall
produce a surface or feature equal to the condition of each before the work began.
REFERENCES
A.
Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following
codes, standards and specifications, except where more stringent requirements have been
specified herein:
1.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a.
1.3
D698 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3) (600 kN-m/m3)
SUBMITTALS
A.
In addition to those submittals identified in the Contract Documents, the following items
shall be submitted:
1.
A schedule of restoration operations. After an accepted schedule has been agreed
upon it shall be adhered to unless otherwise revised with the approval of the
Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
09/22/15
In general, permanent restoration of paved surfaces will not be permitted until one
months' time has elapsed after excavations have been completely backfilled as specified.
A greater length of time, but not more than nine months may be allowed to elapse before
Restoration of Surfaces
02502-2
2992/60270
permanent restoration of street surfaces is undertaken, if additional time is required for
shrinkage and settlement of the backfill.
B.
3.2
3.3
TEMPORARY PAVEMENT
A.
Immediately upon completion of refilling of the trench or excavation, the Contractor shall
place a temporary pavement over all disturbed areas of streets, driveways, sidewalks, and
other traveled places where the original surface has been disturbed as a result of his
operations.
B.
Unless otherwise specified or directed the temporary pavement shall consist of dense
graded aggregate to such a depth as required to withstand the traffic to which it will be
subjected.
C.
Where concrete pavements are removed, the temporary pavement shall be surfaced with
"cold patch". The surface of the temporary pavement shall conform to the slope and
grade of the area being restored.
D.
For dust prevention, the Contractor shall treat all surfaces, not covered with cold patch, as
frequently as may be required.
E.
The temporary pavement shall be maintained by the Contractor in a safe and satisfactory
condition until such time as the permanent paving is completed. The Contractor shall
immediately remove and restore all pavement as shall become unsatisfactory.
PERMANENT PAVEMENT REPLACEMENT
A.
3.4
The replacement of surfaces at any time, as scheduled or as directed, shall not relieve the
Contractor of responsibility to repair damages by settlement or other failures.
The permanent and final repaving of all streets, driveways and similar surfaces where
pavement has been removed, disturbed, settled or damaged by or as a result of
performance of the Contract shall be repaired and replaced by the Contractor, by a new
and similar pavement.
1.
The top surface shall conform with the grade of existing adjacent pavement and
the entire replacement shall meet the current specifications of the local
community for the particular types of pavement.
2.
Where the local community has no specification for the type of pavement, the
work shall be done in conformity with the State Department of Transportation
Standard which conforms the closest to the type of surfacing being replaced, as
determined by the Engineer.
PREPARATION FOR PERMANENT PAVEMENT
09/22/15
Restoration of Surfaces
02502-3
2992/60270
A.
When scheduled and within the time specified, the temporary pavement shall be removed
and a base prepared, at the depth required by the local community, State Department of
Transportation, or Highway Permit, to receive the permanent pavement.
1.
The base shall be brought to the required grade and cross-section and thoroughly
compacted before placing the permanent pavement.
2.
Any base material which has become unstable for any reason shall be removed
and replaced with compacted base materials.
B.
Prior to placing the permanent pavement all service boxes, manhole frames and covers
and similar structures within the area shall be adjusted to the established grade and crosssection.
C.
The edges of existing asphalt pavement shall be cut a minimum of 1 foot beyond the
excavation or disturbed base whichever is greater.
1.
3.5
3.6
All cuts shall be parallel or perpendicular to the centerline of the street.
ASPHALT PAVEMENT
A.
The permanent asphalt pavement replacement for streets, driveways and parking area
surfaces shall be replaced with bituminous materials of the same depth and kind as the
existing unless otherwise specified.
B.
Prior to placing of any bituminous pavement a sealer shall be applied to the edges of the
existing pavement and other features.
C.
The furnishing, handling and compaction of all bituminous materials shall be in
accordance with the State Department of Transportation Standards.
CONCRETE PAVEMENT AND PAVEMENT BASE
A.
Concrete pavements and concrete bases for asphalt, brick or other pavement surfaces
shall be replaced with Class "B" Concrete, air-entrained.
B.
Paving slabs or concrete bases shall be constructed to extend 1 foot beyond each side of
the trench and be supported on undisturbed soil. Where such extension of the pavement
will leave less than 2 feet of original pavement slab or base, the repair of the pavement
slab or base shall be extended to replace the slab to the original edge of the pavement or
base unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings.
C.
Where the edge of the pavement slab or concrete base slab falls within the excavation, the
excavation shall be backfilled with Special Backfill compacted to 95% maximum dry
density as determined by ASTM D 698 up to the base of the concrete.
09/22/15
Restoration of Surfaces
02502-4
2992/60270
D.
The new concrete shall be of the same thickness as the slab being replaced and shall
contain reinforcement equal to the old pavement.
1.
3.7
STONE OR GRAVEL PAVEMENT
A.
3.8
New concrete shall be placed and cured in accordance with the applicable
provisions of the State Department of Transportation Standards.
All pavement and other areas surfaced with stone or gravel shall be replaced with
material to match the existing surface unless otherwise specified. All new proposed
gravel pavement shall be Type 2 Class "B" in accordance with NJDOT standards.
1.
The depth of the stone or gravel shall be at least equal to the existing, and in no
case shall be less than 6 inches.
2.
After compaction the surface shall conform to the slope and grade as shown on
the site plan.
CONCRETE WALKS, CURBS AND GUTTER REPLACEMENT
A.
Concrete walks, curbs and gutters removed or damaged in connection with or as a result
of the construction operations shall be replaced with new construction.
1.
B.
The minimum replacement will be a flag or block of sidewalk and 5 feet of curb
or gutter.
Walks shall be constructed of Class "B" concrete, air-entrained with aggregate on a 4inch base of compacted gravel or stone.
1.
The walk shall be not less than 4 inches in thickness or the thickness of the
replaced walk where greater than 4 inches, shall have construction joints spaced
not more than 25 feet apart, shall have expansion joints spaced not more than 50
feet apart and shall be sloped at right angles to the longitudinal centerline
approximately inch per foot of width.
C.
2-inch expansion joint material shall be placed around all objects within the sidewalk
area as well as objects to which the new concrete will abut, such as valve boxes, manhole
frames, curbs, buildings and others.
D.
Walks shall be hand-floated and broom-finished, edged and grooved at construction
joints and at intermediate intervals matching those intervals of the walk being replaced.
1.
09/22/15
The intermediate grooves shall be scored a minimum of 1/4 of the depth of the
walk.
Restoration of Surfaces
02502-5
2992/60270
2.
E.
The minimum length of curb or gutter to be left in place or replaced shall be 5 feet.
Where a full section is not being replaced, the existing curb or gutter shall be saw cut to
provide a true edge.
1.
F.
3.9
The restored curb or gutter shall be the same shape, thickness and finish as being
replaced and shall be built of the same concrete and have construction and
expansion joints as stated above for sidewalks.
Concrete shall be maintained in a moist condition for seven days using methods that will
induce complete and continuous saturation. Sidewalks, curbs and gutters may be cured by
the use of a pigmented membrane curing compound applied in accordance with the
manufacturer’s directions.
OTHER TYPES OF RESTORATION
A.
Trees, shrubs and landscape items damaged or destroyed as a result of the construction
operations shall be replaced in like species and size.
1.
3.10
The lengths of blocks formed by the grooving tool, and distances between
construction and expansion joints shall be uniform throughout the length of the
walk in any one location.
All planting and care thereof shall meet the standards of the American
Association of Nurserymen.
B.
Water courses shall be reshaped to the original grade and cross-section and all debris
removed. Where required to prevent erosion, the bottom and sides of the water course
shall be protected.
C.
Culverts destroyed or removed as a result of the construction operations shall be replaced
in like size and material and shall be replaced at the original location and grade. When
there is minor damage to a culvert and with the consent of the Engineer, a repair may be
undertaken, if satisfactory results can be obtained.
D.
Should brick pavements be encountered in the work, the restoration shall be as set forth
in the Supplemental and Special Conditions or as directed.
MAINTENANCE
A.
The finished products of restoration shall be maintained in an acceptable condition for
and during a period of one year following the date of Substantial Completion or other
such date as set forth elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
*****
09/22/15
Restoration of Surfaces
Page Intentionally Left Blank
02600-1
2992/60270
SECTION 02600
PIPELINE INSTALLATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes all metallic and non-metallic pipelines as shown on the Contract
Drawings, complete with fittings and specials.
B.
Certain features of pipes shall be as scheduled.
REFERENCES
A.
Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following
codes, standards, and specifications, except where more stringent requirements have been
specified herein:
1.
2.
1.3
American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
American Water Works Association (AWWA)
SUBMITTALS
A.
In addition to those submittals identified in the Contract Documents, the following items
shall be submitted:
1.
Manufacturer’s certification that all materials furnished are in compliance with
the applicable requirements of the referenced standards and this specification.
2.
Layout drawings are required for pipelines to be installed within structures,
showing the location including the support system, sleeves and appurtenances.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A.
Pipe
1.
Materials for the piping, joints and fittings shall be as specified in the Section for
the type of pipe to be installed, shown in the pipe schedule or on the Contract
Drawings.
a.
B.
09/02/15
Pipe and appurtenances shall comply with the applicable standards for its
type of material.
Joints
Pipeline Installation
02600-2
2992/60270
1.
C.
Type of joints shall be as scheduled in the pipe schedule or as shown or noted on
the Contract Drawings.
Inspection
1.
Pipe and appurtenances shall be inspected by the Contractor in the presence of
the Engineer on delivery and prior to installation for conformance with the
standards and specifications.
a.
2.2
Materials not conforming to the standards and specifications shall not be
stored on site but removed at once and replaced with material
conforming to the specifications.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Wall Castings and Sleeves
1.
All pipelines passing through walls, floors or slabs of structures shall be installed
in a wall casting or sleeve. The wall castings and sleeves shall be in accordance
with the Section entitled "Wall Castings and Sleeves".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION - EXPOSED
A.
Exposed pipelines shall be carefully erected and neatly arranged.
1.
3.2
B.
Supports and anchors shall be adequate to support the pipe filled with water with a
minimum safety factor of 5 and for the test pressure specified.
C.
Special supports shall be as specified in the Section for the type of pipe being installed.
FIELD TESTING AND CHLORINATION
A.
3.3
Pipelines shall run parallel to the nearest wall of structures.
Perform leakage tests in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Section entitled
“Leakage Tests”, at the test pressure specified or scheduled.
CUTTING AND SPECIAL HANDLING
A.
Field cuts of pipes shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Where a pipe requires special handling or installation it shall be in accordance with the
Section for that type of pipe.
*****
09/02/15
Pipeline Installation
02602-1
2992/60270
SECTION 02602
LEAKAGE TESTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes leakage tests of all hydraulic structures, pressure and nonpressure
piping for leakage as specified.
1.
B.
1.2
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, test connections, vents, water
and materials necessary for carrying out the pressure and leakage tests.
All testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer.
SUBMITTALS
A.
In addition to those submittals identified in the Contract Documents, the following items
shall be submitted:
1.
Reports of test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TESTS ON PRESSURE PIPING FOR TRANSPORT OF WATER OR SEWAGE
A.
09/02/15
General
1.
Pipelines designed to transport water or sewage under pressure shall be tested
hydrostatically and for leakage prior to being placed in service.
2.
The length of piping and sections included in the tests shall meet the approval of
the Engineer.
3.
Equipment in or attached to the pipes being tested shall be protected. Any
damage to such equipment during the test shall be repaired by the Contractor at
his expense.
4.
When piping is to be insulated or concealed in a structure, tests shall be made
before the pipe is covered.
Leakage Tests
02602-2
2992/60270
B.
C.
5.
All fittings, hydrants and appurtenances must be properly braced and harnessed
before the pressure is applied. Thrust restraining devices which will become a
part of the system must also be tested at the test pressure.
6.
When testing absorbent pipe materials such as asbestos cement or concrete, the
pipeline shall be filled with water at least 24 hours before the test is made.
7.
If the line fails the test, the Contractor shall explore for the cause of the excessive
leakage and after repairs have been made the line shall be retested. This
procedure shall be repeated until the pipe complies.
Pressure Test
1.
Test pressure shall be as scheduled or, where no pressure is scheduled, shall be
150 psi.
2.
Test pressure shall be held on the piping for a period of at least 2 hours, unless a
longer period is requested by the Engineer.
Leakage Test
1.
The leakage test shall be conducted concurrently with the pressure test.
2.
The rate of leakage shall be determined at 15-minute intervals by means of
volumetric measurement of the makeup water added to maintain the test pressure.
The test shall proceed until the rate of leakage has stabilized or is decreasing
below an allowable value, for three consecutive 15-minute intervals. After this,
the test pressure shall be maintained for at least another 15 minutes.
a.
At the completion of the test the pressure shall be released at the
furthermost point from the point of application.
3.
All exposed piping shall be examined during the test and all leaks, defective
material or joints shall be repaired or replaced before repeating the tests.
4.
The allowable leakage for pressure pipelines shall not exceed the following in
gallons per 24 hours per inch of diameter per mile of pipe:
Type of Pipe
09/02/15
Leakage
Ductile iron
10
Polyvinyl chloride, thermal plastic or fiberglass with
rubber joints
10
Polyvinyl chloride, thermal plastic or fiberglass with
solvent-cemented joints
0
Leakage Tests
02602-3
2992/60270
High Density Polyethylene, with butt fused joints
0
Prestressed Concrete with steel and rubber joints
Steel with welded joints
Steel with harnessed or push-on joints
5.
3.2
10
0
10
Wrought steel
0
Copper
0
All piping inside structures
0
Regardless of the above allowables, any visible leaks shall be permanently
stopped.
TEST FOR NON-PRESSURE PIPELINES FOR TRANSPORT OF WATER OR SEWAGE
A.
09/02/15
General
1.
Pipelines designed to carry water or sewage in open channel flow or at minimal
pressures shall be tested for leakage prior to being placed in service.
2.
The leakage shall be determined by exfiltration, infiltration or low pressure air.
a.
The testing method directed by the Engineer shall take into consideration
the groundwater elevation of the section of pipe being tested.
b.
The maximum non-pressure pipeline to be tested for leakage shall be the
section between manholes or 600 feet as directed by the Engineer.
3.
Intermediate leakage tests during construction shall be made at the Contractor's
discretion. Upon completion of any pipeline, the entire system including
manholes shall be tested for compliance to allowable leakage.
4.
When testing absorbent pipe materials such as cement or concrete, the pipeline
shall be filled with water at least 24 hours before the test is made.
5.
Groundwater level shall be determined by the Contractor prior to any testing by
reading the water level at the observation pipe in the manholes.
6.
If the line fails the test, the Contractor shall explore for the cause of the excessive
leakage and after repairs have been made the line shall be retested. This
procedure shall be repeated until the pipe complies.
Leakage Tests
02602-4
2992/60270
B.
C.
D.
Exfiltration Testing
1.
Exfiltration tests shall be made by filling a section of pipeline with water and
measuring the quantity of leakage.
2.
The head of water at the beginning of the test shall be at least 2 feet above the
highest pipe within the section being tested.
a.
Should groundwater be present within the section being tested, the head
of water for the test shall be 2 feet above the hydraulic gradient of the
groundwater.
b.
Should the requirement of 2 feet of water above the highest pipe subject
any joint at the lower end of the test section to a differential head of
greater than 11.5 feet another method of testing shall be employed.
Infiltration Testing
1.
Infiltration tests will be allowed only when the water table gauges determine the
groundwater level to be 2 feet or more above the highest pipe of the section being
tested.
2.
Infiltration test shall be made by measuring the quantity of water leaking into a
section of pipeline.
3.
Measurement of the infiltration shall be by means of a calibrated weir
constructed at the outlet of the section being tested.
Allowable Leakage for Non-Pressure Pipelines
The allowable leakage (exfiltration or infiltration) for non- pressure pipelines
shall not exceed the following in gallons per 24 hours per inch of diameter per
1000 feet of pipe:
Type of Pipe
09/02/15
Leakage
Ductile iron - mechanical or
push-on joints
10
Polyvinyl chloride, thermal plastic or fiberglass with
rubber joints
10
Polyvinyl chloride, thermal plastic or fiberglass with
solvent-cemented joints
0
Concrete with rubber joints
10
Concrete with steel and rubber joints
10
Corrugated Steel
95
Leakage Tests
02602-5
2992/60270
Clay with rubber gasket joints
20
Cast iron soil pipe
1. drains and vents
2. sewer laterals
0
All piping inside structures
0
Regardless of the above allowable leakage any spurting leaks detected shall be
permanently stopped.
E.
Air Testing
1.
Air testing will only be allowed for air, oil or gas piping.
2.
Air testing for acceptance shall not be performed until the backfilling has been
completed.
3.
Low pressure air tests shall conform to ASTM C 828 except as specified herein
and shall not be limited to type or size of pipe.
4.
All sections of pipelines shall be cleaned and flushed prior to testing.
5.
The air test shall be based on the average holding pressure of 3 psi gauge, a drop
from 3.5 to 2.5 psi, within the period of time allowed for the size of pipe and the
length of the test section. The time allowed for the 1 psi drop in pressure,
measured in seconds, will be computed by the Engineer and will be based on the
limits of ASTM C 828.
6.
a.
When groundwater is present the average test pressure of 3 psig shall be
above any back pressure due to the groundwater level.
b.
The maximum pressure allowed under any condition in air testing shall
be 10 psig. The maximum groundwater level for air testing is 13 feet
above the top of the pipe.
The equipment required for air testing shall be furnished by the Contractor and
shall include the necessary compressor, valves and gauges to allow for the
monitoring of the pressure, release of pressure and a separable test gauge.
a.
3.3
The test gauge shall be sized to allow for the measuring of the one psig
loss allowed during the test period and shall be on a separate line to the
test section.
MANHOLE TESTING
A.
General
1.
09/02/15
Each manhole shall be tested by either exfiltration or infiltration.
Leakage Tests
02602-6
2992/60270
2.
3.4
B.
Exfiltration test may be performed prior to or after backfilling. The test shall be made by
filling the manhole with water and observing the level for a minimum of eight hours.
C.
Infiltration tests shall be performed when the groundwater level is above the joint of the
top section of a precast manhole.
AIR, OIL AND GAS PIPING
A.
3.5
A manhole will be acceptable if the leakage does not exceed an allowable of one
gallon per vertical foot of depth for 24 hours. Regardless of the allowable
leakage any leaks detected shall be permanently stopped.
All pipelines for air, oil and gas shall be cleaned and tested with air at the pressure
specified and no leakage will be allowed. After these tests are complete, fuel gas lines
shall be flushed out with nitrogen or carbon dioxide before fuel gas is admitted.
CHLORINE GAS PIPING
A.
All pipelines for chlorine gas shall be initially tested with nitrogen gas with no leakage
allowed. After the pipelines have been charged with chlorine gas all joints shall be
checked for leakage using ammonia water.
*****
09/02/15
Leakage Tests
02618-1
2992/60270
SECTION 02618
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes centrifugally cast ductile iron pipe and ductile iron fittings as
shown or scheduled on the Contract Drawings, complete with all accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following
codes, standards and specifications, except where more stringent requirements have been
specified herein:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
American Water Works Association (AWWA)
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
SUBMITTALS
A.
In addition to those submittals identified in the Contract Documents, the following items
shall be submitted:
1.
Manufacturer's certification that all materials furnished are in compliance with
the applicable requirements of the referenced standards and this specification.
2.
Pipe and joint details.
3.
Layout drawings for Ductile Iron Pipe to be installed within structures, showing
the location and details of the support system, sleeves and appurtenances.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A.
Ductile iron pipe and ductile iron fittings shall comply with the following standards:
ANSI/AWWA
Ductile Iron Pipe
Fittings
Joints-Mechanical and Push-On
Joints-Flanged
Cement Lining
Polyethylene Encasement
09/02/15
C151
C110
C111
C115
C104
C105
Ductile Iron Pipe
02618-2
2992/60270
Compact Fittings
2.2
C153
B.
All shipments of material shall be tested in accordance with the provisions for testing in
the applicable standards.
C.
All flange material shall be Ductile Iron.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Joints
1.
The type of joints for ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be as scheduled in the
pipe schedule and/or as shown on the Contract Drawings. Retainer glands will
not be allowed for joint restraint unless scheduled in the pipe schedule.
a.
Mechanical joints shall be assembled in accordance with the Notes on
Method of Installation, AWWA C111, Appendix A. All bolts shall be
high strength, low alloy steel and shall be tightened by means of torque
wrenches such that the follower shall be brought up evenly. If effective
sealing is not obtained at the specified torques, the joint shall be
disassembled, cleaned and reassembled.
b.
Restrained joints shall be installed where shown or specified in the
Contract Documents. Restrained joints shall be “TR-Flex, as
manufactured by US Pipe and Foundry, “Super-Lok”, as manufactured
by CLOW, “Snap-Lok”, as manufactured by Griffin Pipe Products,
“Flex-Ring”, as manufactured by American Ductile Iron Pipe,
“Megalug”, as manufactured by EBAA Iron, Inc., or an approved equal.
In addition, restrained joint gaskets manufactured by the above pipe
companies may also be used, subject to the Engineers approval.
c.
Push-on joints shall be assembled using lubricant furnished by the
manufacturer. The joint shall be made by guiding the plain end into the
bell until contact is made with the gasket and exerting sufficient force to
drive the pipe home until penetration is made to the depth recommended
by the manufacturer.
d.
Flanged joints shall be assembled with through bolts of the size required
for the pipe being installed. Stud bolts shall be used only where shown
or required. Connecting flanges shall be in proper alignment and no
external force shall be required or used to bring them together.
1)
Flanges for flanged joints shall be drilled for 125 psi pressure unless
otherwise specified.
a)
09/02/15
Flange bolts and nuts shall be steel, ASTM A307, Grade B, and
shall be zinc or hot dipped galvanized except where other
materials are called for in the pipe schedule.
Ductile Iron Pipe
02618-3
2992/60270
B.
c)
Gaskets for other service shall be as specified.
1.
For ductile iron pipelines 24" diameter or larger, welded-on boss outlets, 8-inch
and smaller in diameter may be used in lieu of tees. Minimum size of welded-on
boss outlets shall be 3-inch in diameter.
2.
Welded-on bosses shall require a minimum pipe class as follows:
a.
Flanged pipe with welded-on bosses, minimum class 53.
b.
All other pipe with welded-on bosses, minimum class 51.
Joint connections for welded-on bosses shall be as follows:
a.
2.3
Gaskets for water and sewage piping shall be 1/8 inch thick of
the rubber type per AWWA C111 unless otherwise specified.
Cloth inserted gaskets shall not be allowed.
Welded-On Bosses
3.
C.
b)
Flange per AWWA C-110 or ANSI B16.1 Class 125 for interior piping
or piping inside of vaults.
4.
Welded-on bosses shall be restrained or blocked in the same manner as a tee.
5.
Welded-on bosses on flanged piping shall meet the following requirements:
a.
The centerline of the outlet shall be a minimum of half of the boss
diameter plus 14-inches from the inside edge of the flange.
b.
For welded-on bosses on pipe other than flanged pipe, the centerline of
the outlet must be a minimum of five feet from the bell face of the
mainline pipe.
Solid Sleeves
1.
Solid sleeves shall be used to connect existing and new process drain piping as
shown on the Contract Drawings.
2.
Solid sleeves shall conform to AWWA C153 for compact fittings and AWWA
C110, unless otherwise specified.
3.
Joints for solid sleeves shall be restrained joints.
COATING, PAINTING AND LINING
A.
09/02/15
Coating, painting and lining shall be as follows unless otherwise specified in the pipe
schedule:
Ductile Iron Pipe
02618-4
2992/60270
1.
Interior:
Pipe installed in the ground, encased in concrete, in exposed exterior locations, in
contact with water or inside structures but not scheduled for painting:
Standard thickness cement lining with sealcoat unless otherwise specified.
Exterior:
2.
Interior:
Pipe installed inside structures or scheduled for painting:
Standard thickness cement lining with sealcoat unless otherwise specified.
Exterior:
2.4
Asphaltic coating.
In accordance with Section 09900.
SCHEDULE
A.
Inside Pipe Schedule
Description
Size
Material
Class
Joint
Test
Pressure
Pump Suction
16”
DIP
52
Flange
150 psi
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Ductile iron pipe shall be installed in accordance with the configuration shown on the
Contract Drawings and applicable provisions of Sections 02600.
B.
All ductile iron pipe and ductile iron fittings shall be handled with padded slings or other
appropriate equipment. The use of cables, hooks or chains will not be permitted.
FIELD TESTING AND CHLORINATION
A.
Perform hydrostatic and leakage tests in accordance with the applicable provisions of
Section 02602, at the test pressure specified or scheduled.
*****
09/02/15
Ductile Iron Pipe
02640-1
2992/60270
SECTION 02640
TAPPED CONNECTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes tapping and installing of corporation stops and valves on existing
or newly installed pipes without interruption of service complete with connections and
accessories.
B.
Installing of curb stops and valve boxes where specified or directed.
REFERENCES
A.
Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following
codes, standards and specifications, except where more stringent requirements have been
specified herein:
1.
1.3
American Water Works Association (AWWA)
SUBMITTALS
A.
In addition to those submittals identified in the Contract Documents, the following items
shall be submitted:
1.
Detail drawings for each size corporation stop, curb stop, tapping sleeve and
valve, and service box.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CORPORATION STOPS
A.
Corporation stops shall be threaded to conform to AWWA C800 with standard
corporation stop thread at the inlet. The outlet shall be fitted with coupling nut for flared
tube service unless otherwise specified.
1.
Corporation stops shall be manufactured by:
a.
b.
c.
d.
09/02/15
Ford
Hays
Mueller
Or equal
Tapped Connections
02640-2
2992/60270
2.2
CURB STOPS
A.
Curb stops shall be threaded to conform to AWWA C 800 with coupling nuts for flared
tube service.
1.
¾-inch shall be of the inverted new type.
2.
1 inch to 2 inch shall be of the plug-type with "O" ring seals to withstand a
minimum working pressure of 175 psi.
3.
Curb stops shall be manufactured by:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.3
SERVICE CLAMPS
A.
Service clamps shall be designed for use on the type of pipe to which the connection is
being made.
1.
Ductile iron and asbestos-cement service clamps shall be the double strap type
with neoprene gaskets.
2.
Polyvinyl chloride pipe service clamps shall be of a full circle design with a
minimum width of 2 inches.
3.
Prestressed concrete pipe service clamps shall be made by or approved for use by
the pipe manufacturer.
4.
Service clamps shall be manufactured by:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.4
Mueller
Hays
Ford
Or equal
Dresser
Mueller
Clow
Or equal
SERVICE BOXES
A.
Service boxes shall be constructed of cast iron and sized for the curb stop upon which it
is being installed.
1.
2.
09/02/15
Stationary shut-off rod shall be provided unless otherwise specified.
Boxes shall be telescopic with a minimum of 1-foot adjustment.
Tapped Connections
02640-3
2992/60270
3.
Service boxes shall be manufactured by:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Hays
Mueller
Clow
Or equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install connections and accessories under the direction of personnel who have performed
at least ten similar connections in accordance with the applicable provisions of the
referenced Standards.
1.
Threaded taps shall be made using a machine designed for cutting, threading and
inserting the corporation without interruption of service.
a.
2.
Teflon tape may be used on corporation threads.
Tapping sleeve connections shall be made using a machine to cut and remove the
segment through the valve without interruption of service.
B.
Service boxes shall be set plumb and shall be independently supported on two bricks so
no weight will be transmitted to the curb stop or carrier pipe.
C.
Maximum Size for Taps
Pipe Material
Ductile Iron
w/Service Clamp
Pipe material
w/o Service Clamp
Asbestos-Cement Polyvinyl Chloride
w/Service Clamp or prethreaded collar
w/o Service Clamp
Steel
09/02/15
Pipe Size (Inches)
4
6
8
12
2
2
2
2
2
Pipe Size (Inches)
4
6
8
12
¾
1
1-½
¾
-
1-½
¾
2
¾
16 & Larger
2
¾
16 & Larger
2
2
3/4
Pipe wall thickness governs size of tap
using appropriate threadolet or
reinforcing.
Tapped Connections
02640-4
2992/60270
3.2
FIELD TESTING
A.
Perform hydrostatic and leakage tests in accordance with the applicable provisions of the
Section entitled “Leakage Tests”, at the test pressure specified or scheduled.
*****
09/02/15
Tapped Connections
03300-1
2992/60270
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement,
concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
REFERENCES
A.
Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following
codes, standards and specifications (Contractor shall provide copies of all documents onsite), except where more stringent requirements are specified herein:
1.
American Concrete Institute (ACI)
a. ACI 117 – Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials.
b. ACI 211.1 – Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight and Mass Concrete.
c. ACI 301 – Specification for Structural Concrete.
d. ACI 304 – Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing
Concrete.
e. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting.
f. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting.
g. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.
h. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
i. ACI 350 – Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures.
j. ACI 350.1 and 350.1R – Tightness Testing of Environmental Engineering
Concrete Structures and Commentary.
k. ACI 350.3R – Seismic Design of Liquid Containing Concrete Structures and
Commentary.
2.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
a. ANSI/ASTM A185 –Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
3.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Billet Steel for
Reinforcement.
b. ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates.
c. ASTM C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete.
d. ASTM C150 Portland Cement.
e. ASTM C260 Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
f. ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
4.
09/02/15
Concrete
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)
a. Manual of Standard Practice.
Cast-in-Place Concrete
03300-2
2992/60270
b.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of
the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated
blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with the General Conditions.
B.
Scheduling: Submit concrete placement schedule before start of placement operations.
Include locations of all joints including construction joints.
C.
Product data for each type of manufactured material and product indicated, including
reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems,
dry-shake finish materials, fiber reinforcement, curing materials, floor and slab
treatments, bonding agents and others, if requested by Owner’s Representative.
D.
Written mix design shall be based on field experience or trial mixture. Submit
documentation in accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.
1.
1.5
Design Handbook.
Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
E.
Qualifications of the proposed testing agency as outlined in the Quality Assurance section
of this specification.
F.
Shop drawings for detailing, fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcement.
Comply with ACI 315 “Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete
Structures” showing bar schedules, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and support of
concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcing required for openings through
concrete structures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production
facilities and equipment.
1.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed
Concrete Production Facilities."
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C
1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
1.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification
program.
09/02/15
Cast-In-Place Concrete
03300-3
2992/60270
2.
1.6
Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be an ACI-certified Concrete
Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified
Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.
C.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents:
1.
ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
D.
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
E.
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management And Coordination."
1.
Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of
each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the
following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Cast-in-place concrete subcontractor.
2.
Review concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting
procedures, curing procedures, construction joints, forms and form-removal
limitations, reinforcement accessory installation, concrete repair procedures, and
protection of cast-in-place concrete.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
B.
Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for formwork and
other form-facing material requirements.
B.
Form-Facing Panels for As-Cast Finishes: Steel, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, or
exterior-grade, medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-applied release agent and
edge sealed plywood panels other approved non-absorptive panel materials that will
provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable
sizes to minimize number of joints.
09/02/15
Cast-in-Place Concrete
03300-4
2992/60270
2.2
C.
Rustication Strips: Metal, rigid plastic or dressed wood with sides beveled and back
kerfed; nonstaining; in longest practicable lengths.
D.
Chamfer Strips: Metal, rigid plastic, elastomeric rubber, or dressed wood, 3/4 by 3/4 inch
(19 by 19 mm), minimum; nonstaining; in longest practicable lengths.
E.
Form Joint Tape:
Compressible foam tape; pressure sensitive; AAMA 800,
"Specification 810.1, Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape"; minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.
F.
Form Joint Sealant: Elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type M or S,
Grade NS that adheres to form joint substrates.
G.
Sealer: Penetrating, clear, polyurethane wood form sealer formulated to reduce
absorption of bleed water and prevent migration of set-retarding chemicals from wood.
H.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated colorless form-release agent that will
not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent
treatments of those surfaces.
1.
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
I.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, internally disconnecting ties designed to resist lateral
pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.
1.
Furnish ties with tapered tie cone spreaders that, when removed, will leave holes
1 inch (25 mm) in diameter on concrete surface.
2.
Furnish internally disconnecting ties that will leave no metal closer than 2 inches
(38 mm) from the concrete surface.
3.
Furnish glass-fiber-reinforced plastic ties, not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in
diameter.
4.
Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls of water retaining
structures.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type,
brand, and source, throughout Project:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II. Supplement with the following:
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
c. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.
B.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 5S coarse aggregate or better, graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least
10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar
aggregates and cementitious materials.
1.
Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm).
2.
Gradation: Uniformly graded.
09/02/15
Cast-In-Place Concrete
03300-5
2992/60270
2.3
2.4
2.5
C.
Normal-Weight Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, manufactured or natural sand, from same
source for entire Project.
D.
Water: Potable, complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M except free of wash water from
mixer washout operations.
ADMIXTURES
A.
General: Admixtures shall be NSF approved for contact with potable water.
B.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
C.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible
with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding
those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures
containing calcium chloride.
1.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.
6.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.
B.
Moisture-Retaining Cover:
polyethylene sheet.
C.
Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B.
1.
For concrete indicated to be sealed, curing compound shall be compatible with
sealer.
ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-
REPAIR MATERIALS
A.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
B.
Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid
curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of
grade to suit requirements.
1.
Types IV or V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
09/02/15
Cast-in-Place Concrete
03300-6
2992/60270
2.6
2.7
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of cast-in-place concrete proportioned
on basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed
design mixtures based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B.
Proportion concrete mixtures as follows:
1.
Minimum Compressive Strength (7 Days): 4500 psi
2.
Minimum Compressive Strength (3 Days): 3500 psi
3.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.42
4.
Exposure Categories and Classes:
a. Freezing and Thawing: F2
5.
Slump Limit: 3 inches (75 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches
(50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or
plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
6.
Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch
(25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
C.
Cementitious Materials: For cast-in-place concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage,
by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301,
318 and 350 requirements. Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag,
and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would
otherwise be used, by not less than 25 percent.
D.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight
of cement.
E.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
2.8
Ready-Mixed or Site-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete
according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
Clean equipment used to mix and deliver cast-in-place concrete to prevent
contamination from other concrete.
2.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature
is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Reinforcing bars shall be ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed. Reinforcing bars to be
welded shall be ASTM A706.
B.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire fabric in place; manufacture according to
CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
09/02/15
Cast-In-Place Concrete
03300-7
2992/60270
1.
2.9
Where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use gray, all-plastic or CRSI
Class 2, stainless-steel bar supports.
FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A.
Synthetic Fiber Reinforcement:
1.
Fiber reinforcement for concrete wall shall be as follows:
a. Novomesh® 950 Blended Synthetic Fibers as manufactured by Propex
Concrete Systems, or approved equal.
b. Application Rate: 5.0 lbs. per cubic yard of concrete minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK
A.
Limit deflection of form-facing panels to not exceed ACI 347 requirements.
B.
In addition to ACI 347 limits on form-facing panel deflection, limit cast-in-place
concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1.
Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm).
C.
Fabricate forms to result in cast-in-place concrete that complies with ACI 117,
"Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
D.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-in-place surfaces.
Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf
wood rustications, keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
1.
Seal form joints and penetrations at form ties with form joint tape or form joint
sealant to prevent cement paste leakage.
2.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
E.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of
formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely
braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at
inconspicuous locations.
F.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of cast-in-place concrete.
G.
Coat contact surfaces of wood rustications and chamfer strips with sealer before placing
reinforcement, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
H.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and
bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing
such items.
09/02/15
Cast-in-Place Concrete
03300-8
2992/60270
3.2
3.3
3.4
I.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust,
dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
J.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks
and maintain proper alignment.
K.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's
written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
L.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with surface retarder, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
REINFORCEMENT AND INSERTS
A.
Securely fasten steel reinforcement and wire ties against shifting during concrete
placement.
B.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A.
Formwork for sides of walls and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of
concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C)
for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by
form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.
1.
Cut off and grind glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties flush with surface of
concrete.
B.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Do not use split, frayed,
delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material. Apply new form-release agent.
C.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close
joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for cast-inplace concrete surfaces.
JOINTS
A.
09/02/15
Construction Joints: Install construction joints true to line with faces perpendicular to
surface plane of cast-in-place concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not
impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
1.
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into
concrete. Align construction joint within rustications attached to form-facing
material.
Cast-In-Place Concrete
03300-9
2992/60270
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
3.5
Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans.
Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a
beam-girder intersection.
Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs,
beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral
with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints true to line with faces
perpendicular to surface plane of cast-in-place concrete so strength and appearance of
concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, form-release agent,
reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been
performed.
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless
approved by Engineer.
C.
Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, up to the
limits of the specified water-cement ratio and slump, subject to limitations of ACI 301.
This presumes that not all mixing water is added at the batching plant.
1.
Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures
to mixture.
D.
Deposit concrete continuously between construction joints. Deposit concrete to avoid
segregation.
1.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design
pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to
ACI 301.
3.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed
layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators
into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. Do not permit
vibrators to contact forms.
E.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work
from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions,
or low temperatures.
1.
When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4
deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture
temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.
09/02/15
Cast-in-Place Concrete
03300-10
2992/60270
2.
3.
4.
F.
3.6
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents.
Do not use chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in
design mixtures.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 305 and as follows:
1.
Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement.
Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,
provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water.
Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
QUALITY CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION
A.
The Contractor shall employ a testing agency, approved by the Engineer, to perform tests
and to submit test reports. Field testing to be performed by an ACI certified concrete field
testing technician grade I.
B.
Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the
following, as directed by Engineer.
1.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply
with ASTM C94.
a. Slump testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C143; one test at point of
discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when
concrete consistency seems to have changed.
b. Air content testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C173, volumetric
method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C231, pressure
method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of
air-entrained concrete.
c. Testing of concrete temperature shall be in accordance with ASTM C1064;
one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below, when
80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressivestrength specimens.
d. Molding of cylinders for compression testing shall be in accordance with
ASTM C31; one set of two standard 6-inch dia. Cylinders for each
compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store
cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test
specimens are required.
e. Compressive-strength testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C 39; one
set for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof, of each concrete mix placed in
any one day; three specimen tested at 3 days three specimens tested at 7
days, and three specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
2.
09/02/15
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given
class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or
from each batch if fewer than five are used.
Cast-In-Place Concrete
03300-11
2992/60270
3.7
3.8
3.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion
laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.
4.
Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of
three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive
strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 500 psi.
C.
Test results will be reported in writing to Engineer, ready-mix producer, and Contractor
within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing
service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design
compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive
breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.
D.
Nondestructive testing shall consist of impact hammer, sonoscope, or other
nondestructive device but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
E.
The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results
indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in
the structure, as directed by Engineer. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, or by other
methods as directed.
REMOVING FORMS
A.
Formwork not supporting the weight of concrete, such as sides of walls, and similar parts
of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg
C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be
damaged by form-removal operations, concrete is able to support its own weight and
provided curing and protection operations are maintained.
B.
Form-facing material may be removed 3 days after placement only if shores and other
vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing material without
loosening or disturbing shores and supports.
REUSING FORMS
A.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated,
or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces.
Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork.
B.
When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces,
remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to
avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as
acceptable to Owner’s Representative.
09/02/15
Cast-in-Place Concrete
03300-12
2992/60270
3.9
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A.
Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removing forms,
when acceptable to Owner’s Representative.
B.
Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of 1 part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate
passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and
placing.
1.
Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and
holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth
less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface.
Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with
bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.
2.
For surfaces exposed to view, blend white Portland cement and standard Portland
cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide
test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before
proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
C.
Remove and replace formed concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be
repaired to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative. Surface defects include color and
texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other
projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by
cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry-pack mortar or precast cement cone
plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
1.
Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect
the concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the
concrete.
D.
Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface
tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified.
Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a
template having the required slope.
1.
Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete’s
durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch
wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced
sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and
other objectionable conditions.
2.
Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at
least 14 days.
3.
Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing
surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching
mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary
underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Owner’s
Representative.
4.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding
1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove
defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least
3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with
09/02/15
Cast-In-Place Concrete
03300-13
2992/60270
patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same
materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place,
compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same
manner as adjacent concrete.
3.10
E.
Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry-pack
method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt,
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound.
Place dry-pack before bonding agent has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and
finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72
hours.
F.
Perform structural repairs with prior acceptance by Owner’s Representative for method
and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar.
G.
Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Owner’s
Representative.
AS-CAST FORMED FINISHES
A.
3.11
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with
tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding
specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 305
for hot-weather protection during curing.
B.
Begin curing cast-in-place concrete immediately after applying as-cast formed finishes to
concrete. Cure according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following
methods that will not mottle, discolor, or stain concrete:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep exposed surfaces of cast-in-place concrete continuously
moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover
concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent
absorptive covers.
2.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moistureretaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides
and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or
adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or
tears during curing period; use cover material and waterproof tape.
3.
Curing Compound: Mist concrete surfaces with water. Apply curing compound
uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to
09/02/15
Cast-in-Place Concrete
03300-14
2992/60270
manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and
repair damage during curing period.
END OF SECTION
09/02/15
Cast-In-Place Concrete
09900-1
2992/60270
SECTION 09900
FIELD PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes Field Painting of all work indicated on the Contract Drawings and
specified herein.
REFERENCES
A.
Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following
codes, standards and specifications, except where more stringent requirements have been
specified herein:
1.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
2.
1.3
1.4
C2246 - Freeze-Thaw Test
b.
D2247 - Humidity Test
c.
B117 - Salt Spray Test
d.
E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics Test
e.
D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and
Related Products
f.
D2805 - Contrast Ratio
g.
D1308 - Stain Resistance
h.
D4060 - Abrasion
i.
D4541 - Adhesion
j.
D522 - Conical Mandrel Elongation
The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All materials shall remain in their original containers with manufacturer's label intact.
Manufacturer's name, product name and number, and color and batch number, shall
appear on the label.
B.
Manufacturer's representative shall be available to advise applicator on proper application
techniques and procedures.
SUBMITTALS
A.
09/02/15
a.
In addition to conforming to the requirements described in the General Conditions,
submittals shall conform to the following requirements.
1.
Manufacturer's descriptive data fully describing each product to include solids
by volume and V.O.C. ratings.
2.
Manufacturer's certification that all materials furnished are in compliance with
the applicable requirements of the referenced standards and this specification.
3.
Manufacturer's application instructions.
Field Painting
09900-2
2992/60270
4.
Color charts illustrating range of colors available for selection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
2.3
The following manufacturers are named to establish a standard of quality necessary for
the Project:
1.
International Protective Coatings
2.
The Sherwin Williams Company
3.
Tnemec Company
GENERAL
A.
Coatings shall be applied per manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
All coordination for compatibility between shop primers, shop finish coats, field coats,
and possible tie coats, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
C.
All field surfaces prepared for field painting will be reviewed by the Engineer before
coating application begins.
D.
All coatings specified herein are in addition to shop coatings specified elsewhere.
E.
Apply coatings with a brush or a roller. Spray paint only where scheduled or with
Engineer's review.
F.
Or per manufacturer’s product datapage instructions.
G.
Clean damaged shop coatings and retouch before any successive field painting is
performed.
EXTRA STOCK
A.
One gallon of unopened paint, in each type and color specified, shall be furnished to the
Owner. Multi-component paints shall be supplied as a complete kit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PRE-APPLICATION
A.
09/02/15
Examine surfaces to be coated and report any conditions that would adversely affect the
appearance or performance of the coating systems, and which cannot be put into an
acceptable condition by the preparatory work specified.
Field Painting
09900-3
2992/60270
3.2
B.
The Contractor shall insure that moisture content of surfaces is within manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C.
Do not apply coatings when relative humidity is above 85 percent or when temperatures
are less than 5 degrees F above the dew point. Do not apply coatings to damp or wet
surfaces unless product is specifically formulated to do so.
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
B.
General
1.
Remove dust and loose material by dusting, sweeping, vacuuming, or blowing
with high-pressure air.
2.
Remove oil, wax, and grease in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.
Verify with Engineer that all surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free from
dirt, dust, wax, grease, or other contaminants.
4.
Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixtures, trim, and fittings prior to
preparing surfaces.
5.
Shellac and/or seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes that could
not be removed.
Metals
1.
Prepare all non-primed metal surfaces in accordance with the Steel Structures
Painting Manual, Volume 2.
a.
Sandblasting shall conform to the Steel Structures Painting Council
Surface (see above) Preparations Specifications for commercial blast
cleaning (SSPC-SP 6).
Before blast cleaning begins, the Contractor shall prepare a sample
which shall correspond to the photographic standards of SSPC.
SSPC-VIS 1
b.
2.
c.
Proportions of sand, grit, or shot shall be adjusted as necessary to
produce a prepared surface equivalent to the reviewed sample and per
manufacturer’s recommended surface profile.
d.
Applications of protective coatings shall be within 8 hours after blast
cleaning.
e.
Surfaces showing any traces of rust shall be blasted again before
application of protective coatings.
f.
In areas where assemblies are to receive a sandblasted surface
preparation, and portions of the assembly have been previously coated,
all prior coatings shall be removed by blast cleaning to the extent
necessary for proper adhesion of the specified coating.
Shop Primed Metals or Ferrous Metals
a.
3.
09/02/15
SSPC-SP3-Power Tool Clean field connections, welds, burned, and
abraded areas to remove rust and contaminants; touch up with
specified primer. Feather edges to make patches inconspicuous where
exposed to view.
Ferrous Metal - Submerged Service
Field Painting
09900-4
2992/60270
a.
4.
SSPC-SP10 - Near White Blast Clean
Ferrous Metal - Non-Submerged Service
a.
5.
SSPC-SP6 - Commercial Blast Clean
Non-Ferrous Metal
6.
a.
SSPC-SP1 - Solvent Cleaning
b.
SSPC SP 16
Galvanized Metal
a.
SSPC-SP1 - Solvent Cleaning.
SSPC-SP7 – Brush-Off Blast Cleaning: care shall be taken not to damage
or remove galvanized: provide a uniform 1-mil profile.
(FYI: SSPC-SP 1 is included in SSPC-SP7)
b.
C. Concrete and Masonry : Reference the following surface prep standards: SSPC-SP13 Surface
Preparation of Concrete, and ICRI Guideline 310.2 CSP 1-9.
1.
Allow new concrete and masonry to cure 28 days.
D.
2.
Patch holes and cracks in the concrete flush with the surface using a portland
cement grout patching material or equivalent.
3.
Clean mortar joints
4.
Remove stains caused by weathering or corroding metals by cleaning with
manufacturer’s approved methods.
5.
Verify required acid/alkali balance and allowable moisture content of material.
Possible PH and Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test.
6.
Brush Off Blast Cleaning: The surface shall be lightly abraded without entirely
removing the surface or exposing the underlying aggregates. The cleaned
surface shall have the uniform texture of 100 grit medium sand paper.
7.
For concrete floors: whip blast, or mechanical shot blast in accordance with
paint manufacturers recommended procedures.
Wood
1.
Wipe off dust and grit just prior to painting.
2.
Remove or seal all pitch or deposits with a sealer compatible with the finish
coating system.
3.
Seal knots and sappy sections with a sealer compatible with the finish coating
system.
4.
Exterior Wood
a.
5.
Glue-Laminated Beams
a.
6.
Prior to finishing, was surfaces with solvent
Interior Wood
a.
09/02/15
After prime has been applied , fill nail holes with [tinted] caulking
compound suitable for an exterior application, and compatible with the
coating system..
After primer has dried, fill nail holes and racks with wood filler, Gypsum
Wall Board
Field Painting
09900-5
2992/60270
7.
Smooth Siding and Finish Woodwork
a.
E.
Gypsum Wall Board
1.
F.
3.4
3.5
Remove mildew and mode in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
APPLICATION
A.
Mix and thin material in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
Allow each coat to dry thoroughly before recoating. Follow manufacturer’s drying
schedule.
B.
Vary color slightly to indicate each successive coating.
C.
Cut in edges clean and sharp where work joins other materials or colors.
D.
Make finish coats smooth, uniform in color, and free of brush marks, laps, runs, dry
spray, overspray, and missed areas.
E.
Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain
before set. Wipe excess from surface.
F.
Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.
G.
Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish
with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.
UNCOATED MATERIALS AND ITEMS
A.
Glazed wall finishes, special coatings, and floor finishes are specified elsewhere.
B.
Surfaces not requiring protective coatings:
1.
Brass, Aluminum, PVC, Bronze, Copper
SCHEDULE FOR PAINTING AND FINISHING
A.
Brush or roller application and spray application on metal deck and bar joist ceiling may
require two coats to achieve required mil thickness.
B.
Actual film thickness will depend on porosity of surface.
C.
Dry Film Thickness (D.F.T.).
D.
a.
SSPC PA2 Measurement of Dry Coatings Thickness with Magnetic Gages
b.
SSPC PA9 Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness on Cementitious
Surfaces
c.
Recommend Third Party Inspection for all required inspection.
Steel-Structural, Tanks, Pipes and Equipment
1.
09/02/15
Verify surface is free of dust, and ready to receive primer.
Impervious Surfaces
1.
3.3
Sand rough, irregular spots.
Exterior, Non-Immersion and Interior at Wet Locations
Field Painting
09900-6
2992/60270
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
1st Coat: Interseal 670HS
2nd Coat: Interseal 670HS
3rd Coat: Interthane 990 Series
3.0 - 5.0
4.0 - 6.0
3.0 - 4.0
10.0 -15.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
2nd Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
3rd Coat: Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane,
B65 Series/B65V600
3.0 – 5.0
4.0 – 6.0
3.0 - 4.0
10.0 – 15.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
1st Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2nd Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
3rd Coat: 74/75 - Color EnduraShield
74/75 Discontinued?
2.
3.0 - 5.0
4.0 - 6.0
2.0 - 3.0
9.0 -14.0
Interior, Non-Immersion
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
1st Coat: Interline 850
2nd Coat: Interline 850
5.0 - 6.0
5.0 - 6.0
10.0 -12.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6 –
1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
2nd Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
Tnemec
3.0 – 5.0
4.0 – 6.0
7.0 – 11.0
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
09/02/15
Field Painting
09900-7
2992/60270
1st Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2nd Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
3.
Immersion, Potable Water
3.0 - 5.0
4.0 - 6.0
7.0 -11.0
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
1st Coat: Interline 850
2nd Coat: Interline 850
5.0 - 6.0
5.0 - 6.0
10.0 -12.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
1st Coat: SherPlate PW Epoxy with
Opti-Check OAP Technology,
B62 Series/B62V265
20.0
20.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
Roughen the surface before topcoating if the N140 has
been exposed exterior for 14 days or longer
1st Coat: N140 Pota-Pox Plus
2nd Coat: N140 Pota-Pox Plus
4.
6.0 - 8.0
6.0 - 8.0
12.0 -16.0
Immersion, Non-Potable Water
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
1st Coat: Interseal 670HS
2nd Coat: Interseal 670HS
6.0 - 8.0
6.0 - 8.0
12.0 -16.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
1st Coat: DuraPlate 235 Multi-Purpose Epoxy,
B67-235/B67V235
2nd Coat: DuraPlate 235 Multi-Purpose Epoxy,
B67-235/B67V235
09/02/15
4.0 – 8.0
4.0 – 8.0
8.0 – 16.0
Field Painting
09900-8
2992/60270
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
Roughen the surface before topcoating if the 104
has been exposed exterior for 14 days or longer.
1st Coat: 104H.S. Epoxy
2nd Coat: 104 H.S. Epoxy
5.
8.0 - 10.0
8.0 - 10.0
16.0 - 20.0
Interior, Non-Immersion, Corrosive Area
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
1st Coat: Intercure 200HS
2.0 - 3.0
2nd Coat: Intercure 99
4.0 - 6.0
6.0 - 9.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
2nd Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
4.0 – 6. 0
4.0 – 6.0
8.0 – 12.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
1st Coat: L69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2nd Coat: L69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
E.
Galvanized Steel, Non-Ferrous Metal, Pipe, and Miscellaneous Fabrications
1.
09/02/15
4.0 - 8.0
4.0 - 8.0
8.0 – 16.0
Exterior, Non-Immersion and Interior at Wet Locations
Field Painting
09900-9
2992/60270
International
D.F.T * (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC- 1and SSPC-SP7
1st Coat: Interseal 670HS
2nd Coat: Interthane 990 Series
4.0 - 6.0
3.0 - 4.0
7.0 -10.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC- SP1and SSPC-SP7
1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
2nd Coat: Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane,
B65 Series/B65V600
4.0 – 6.0
3.0 – 4.0
7.0 – 10.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP1and SSPC-SP7
1st Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2nd Coat: 74/75 - Color EnduraShield
2.
4.0 - 6.0
2.0 - 3.0
6.0 - 9.0
Interior, Non-Immersion
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP1 and SSPC-SP7
1st Coat: Interseal 670HS
2nd Coat: Interseal 670HS
4.0 - 6.0
4.0 - 6.0
8.0 -12.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC- SP1and SSPC-SP7
1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
2nd Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
4.0 – 6.0
4.0 – 6.0
8.0 – 12.0
Tnemec
09/02/15
Field Painting
09900-10
2992/60270
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP1and SSPC-SP7
1st Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2nd Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
3.
4.0 - 6.0
4.0 - 6.0
8.0 -12.0
Interior, Non-Immersion, Corrosive Area
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC- 1and SSPC-SP7
1st Coat: Interseal 670HS
2nd Coat: Interseal 990 Series
4.0 - 6.0
4.0 - 6.0
8.0 -12.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
2nd Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
4.0 – 6.0
4.0 – 6.0
8.0 – 12.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
1st Coat: L69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2nd Coat: L69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
F.
4.0 - 8.0
4.0 - 8.0
8.0 -16.0
Concrete
1.
Immersion, Non-Potable Water
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Brush-Off Blast
1st Coat: Interseal 670HS
2nd Coat: Interseal 670HS
6.0 - 8.0
6.0 - 8.0
12.0 -16.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
09/02/15
Field Painting
09900-11
2992/60270
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 13 or ICRI CSP 1-3
1st Coat: Dura-Plate 235 Multi-Purpose Epoxy,
B67-235/B67V235
2nd Coat: Dura-Plate 235 Multi-Purpose Epoxy,
B67-235/B67V235
4.0 – 8.0
4.0 – 8.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Brush-Off Blast
Roughen the surface before topcoating if the 104-color has
been exposed exterior for 14 days or longer
1st Coat: 104 H.S. Epoxy
2nd Coat: 104 H.S. Epoxy
2.
8.0-10.0
8.0-10.0
16.0-20.0
Interior, Wet Location
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: clean and dry
1st Coat: Intergard 345
2nd Coat: Intergard 345
4.0 - 6.0
4.0 - 6.0
8.0 -12.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-P 13 or ICRI 1-3
1st Coat: Dura-Plate 235 Multi-Purpose Epoxy,
B67-235/B67V235
2nd Coat: Dura-Plate 235 Multi-Purpose Epoxy,
B67-235/B67V235
4.0 - 6.0
4.0 - 6.0
8.0 -12.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry
1st Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2nd Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
3.
09/02/15
4.0 - 6.0
4.0 - 6.0
8.0 -12.0
Interior, Low Odor
Field Painting
09900-12
2992/60270
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry
1st Coat: Intergard 740
2nd Coat: Intergard 740
3rd Coat: Intergard 740
2.0 - 2.5
2.0 - 2.5
2.0 - 2.5
6.0 - 7.5
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 13 or ICRI CSP 1-3
-1st Coat: ProIndustrial Hi-Bild Waterbased
Catalyzed Epoxy, B71-100 Series/B71V Series 2.0 – 2.5
-2nd Coat: ProIndustrial Hi-Bild Waterbased
Catalyzed Epoxy, B71-100 Series/B71V Series 2.0 – 2.5
-3rd Coat: ProIndustrial Hi-Bild Waterbased
Catalyzed Epoxy, B71-100 Series/B71V Series 2.0 – 2.5
6.0 – 7.5
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry
1st Coat: 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat
2nd Coat: 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat
3rd Coat: 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat
5.
2.0 - 2.5
2.0 - 2.5
2.0 - 2.5
6.0 - 7.5
Interior, Corrosive Area
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry
1st Coat: Interseal 670HS
2nd Coat: Interseal 670HS
6.0 - 8.0
6.0 - 8.0
12.0 – 16.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 13 or ICRI CSP 3-5
2nd Coat: Cor-Cote HP High Performance Epoxy,
B62-410/B62V410
3rd Coat: Cor-Cote HP High Performance Epoxy,
B62-410/B62V410
09/02/15
5.0 - 8.0
5.0 - 8.0
10.0 – 16.0
Field Painting
09900-13
2992/60270
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry
2nd Coat: 280 Tneme-Glaze
3rd Coat: 280 Tneme-Glaze
G.
4.0 - 8.0
4.0 - 8.0
8.0 – 16.0
Concrete Block & Porous Masonry
1.
Interior, Wet Location
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: clean and dry
1st Coat: Interlac 895
2nd Coat: Intergard 475HS
3rd Coat: Intergard 475HS
4.0 - 6.0
4.0 - 6.0
8.0 -12.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 13 or ICRI 1-3
1st Coat: Cement-Plex 875, B42W200/B42V201
2nd Coat: Dura-Plate 235 Multi-Purpose Epoxy,
B67-235/B67V235
3rd Coat: Dura-Plate 235 Multi-Purpose Epoxy,
B67-235/B67V235
As needed
4.0 - 6.0
4.0 - 6.0
8.0 -12.0 (over the
filler)
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry
1st Coat: 130 Envirofill
2nd Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
3rd Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2.
100 sq. ft. per gal.
4.0 - 6.0
4.0 - 6.0
8.0 -12.0
(over filler)
Interior, Low Odor
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: clean and dry
1st Coat: Interlac 895
2nd Coat: Intergard 740
3rd Coat: Intergard 740
09/02/15
2.0 - 3.0
2.0 - 3.0
Field Painting
09900-14
2992/60270
4.0 - 6.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 13 or ICRI CSP 1-3
1st Coat: Cement-Plex 875, B42W200/B42V201
2nd Coat: ProIndustrial Hi-Bild Waterbased
Catalyzed Epoxy,
B71-100 Series/B71V Series
3rd Coat: ProIndustrial Hi-Bild Waterbased
Catalyzed Epoxy,
B71-100 Series/B71V Series
As needed
2.0 – 2.5
2.0 – 2.5
4.0 – 5.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry
1st Coat: 130 Envirofill
2nd Coat: 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat
3rd Coat: 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat
3.
100 sq. ft. per gal.
2.0 - 2.5
2.0 - 2.5
4.0 - 5.0
(over filler)
Interior, Corrosive Area
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: clean and dry
1st Coat: Interlac 895
2nd Coat: Interseal 670HS
3rd Coat: Interseal 670HS
2.0 - 3.0
4.0 - 8.0
4.0 - 8.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 13 or ICRI CSP 3-5
1st Coat: Cement-Plex 875, B42W200/B42V201
2nd Coat: Cor-Cote HP High Performance Epoxy,
B62-410/B62V410
3rd Coat: Cor-Cote HP High Performance Epoxy,
B62-410/B62V410
As needed
5.0 - 8.0
5.0 - 8.0
10.0 - 16.0 (over filler)
Tnemec
09/02/15
Field Painting
09900-15
2992/60270
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry
1st Coat: 130 Envirofill
2nd Coat: 280 Tneme-Glaze
3rd Coat: 280 Tneme-Glaze
H.
100 sq. ft. per gal.
4.0 - 8.0
4.0 - 8.0
8.0 - 16.0
Dry Wall
1.
Interior, Low Odor
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: clean and dry
1st Coat: Intergard 740
2nd Coat: Intergard 740
3rd Coat: Intergard 740
1.5 - 2.0
2.0 - 3.0
2.0 - 3.0
5.5 - 8.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry
1st Coat: ProGreen 200 Low Odor Interior Latex Primer
2nd Coat: ProIndustrial Hi-Bild Waterbased
Catalyzed Epoxy,
B71-100 Series/B71V Series
3rd Coat: ProIndustrial Hi-Bild Waterbased
Catalyzed Epoxy,
B71-100 Series/B71V Series
1.5 - 2.0
2.0 – 2.5
2.0 – 2.5
5.5 - 7.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry
1st Coat: 51-792 PVA Sealer
2nd Coat: 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat
3rd Coat: 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat
2.
1.5 - 2.0
2.0 - 2.5
2.0 - 2.5
5.5 - 7.0
Exterior
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: clean and dry
1st Coat: Intergard 740
2nd Coat: Intergard 740
3rd Coat: Intergard 740
09/02/15
1.5 - 2.0
2.0 - 3.0
2.0 - 3.0
Field Painting
09900-16
2992/60270
5.5 - 8.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry
1st Coat: Loxon Conditioner,
A24-100 Series
2nd Coat: ProIndustrial Hi-Bild
Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy,
B71-100 Series/B71V Series
3rd Coat: ProIndustrial Hi-Bild
Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy,
B71-100 Series/B71V Series
200-300 sq ft/gal
2.0 – 2.5
2.0 – 2.5
4.0 – 5.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry
1st Coat: 151-1051 Elasto-Grip FC
2nd Coat: 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat
3rd Coat: 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat
I.
1.0 - 2.0
2.0 - 2.5
2.0 - 2.5
5.5 - 7.0
Insulated Pipe
1.
Interior
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: clean and dry
1st Coat: Interseal 670HS
2nd Coat: Interseal 670HS
5.0 - 6.0
5.0 - 6.0
10.0 -12.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: clean and dry
1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
3rd Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V60
09/02/15
4.0 - 6.0
4.0 - 6.0
8.0 – 12.0
Field Painting
09900-17
2992/60270
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry
1st Coat: 151-1051 Elasto-Grip FC
2nd Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
3rd Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
J.
1.0 - 2.0
2.0 - 3.0
2.0 - 3.0
5.5 - 8.0
Wood
1.
Exterior
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Remove loose paint and caulk, dry
1st Coat: Intercryl 530
2.0 - 3.0
2nd Coat: Intercryl 530
2.0 - 3.0
4.0 - 6.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Remove loose paint and caulk, dry
1st Coat: Sher-Cryl HPA High Performance Acrylic,
B66 Series
2.5 - 3.0
2nd Coat: Sher-Cryl HPA High Performance Acrylic,
B66 Series
2.5 - 3.0
5.0 - 6.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Remove loose paint and caulk, dry
1st Coat: 6 Tneme-Cryl
2.5 - 3.0
2nd Coat: 6 Tneme-Cryl
2.5 - 3.0
5.0 - 6.0
K.
Ferrous piping, valves, operators, misc. appurtenances installed within the pipeline.
All of the following systems are for the coating of the exterior of pipe, valves, etc.
only.
1.
Interior, Immersion, Non-Potable
International
D.F.T. (3)
09/02/15
Field Painting
09900-18
2992/60270
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
1st Coat: Interseal 670HS
2nd Coat: Interseal 670HS
3rd Coat: Interseal 670HS
3.0 - 5.0
4.0 - 6.0
4.0 - 6.0
11.0 -17.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
1st Coat: Dura-Plate 235 Multi-Purpose Epoxy,
B67-235/B67V235
2nd Coat: Dura-Plate 235 Multi-Purpose Epoxy,
B67-235/B67V235
3rd Coat: Dura-Plate 235 Multi-Purpose Epoxy,
B67-235/B67V235
3.0 - 5.0
4.0 - 6.0
4.0 - 6.0
11.0 -17.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
1st Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2nd Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
3rd Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2.
3.0 - 5.0
4.0 - 6.0
4.0 - 6.0
11.0 -17.0
Immersion, Potable Water
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
1st Coat: Interline 850
2nd Coat: Interline 850
5.0 - 6.0
5.0 - 6.0
10.0 -12.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
-1st Coat: SherPlate PW with
Opti-Check OAP Technology,
09/02/15
Field Painting
09900-19
2992/60270
20.0
B62W260/B62V265
20.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
Roughen the surface before topcoating if the 139-1255
has been exterior exposed for 14 days or longer
1st Coat: N140 Pota-Pox Plus
6.0 - 8.0
2nd Coat: N140 Pota-Pox Plus
6.0 - 8.0
12.0 -16.0
3.
Interior, Non-Immersion
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
1st Coat: Interseal 670HS
2nd Coat: Intergard 475HS
3.0 - 5.0
4.0 - 6.0
7.0 -11.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
2nd Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
3.0 - 5.0
4.0 - 6.0
7.0 – 11.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
1st Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2nd Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
4.
3.0 - 5.0
4.0 - 6.0
7.0 -11.0
Exterior, Non-Immersion and Interior Wet Location
International
D.F.T. (3)
09/02/15
Field Painting
09900-20
2992/60270
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
1st Coat: Interseal 670HS
2nd Coat: Intergard 475HS
3rd Coat: Interthane 990 Series
3.0 - 5.0
4.0 - 6.0
3.0 - 4.0
10.0 -15.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
2nd Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
3rd Coat: Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane,
B65 Series/B65V600
3.0 – 5.0
4.0 - 6.0
3.0 – 4.0
10.0 – 15.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
1st Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2nd Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
3rd Coat: 74/75 - Color EnduraShield
I.
3.0 - 5.0
4.0 - 6.0
2.0 - 3.0
9.0 -14.0
Galvanized, Non-Ferrous, Wrought piping, valves, operators, misc. appurtenances
installed within the pipeline. All of the following systems are for the coating of the
exterior of pipe, valves, etc. only.
1.
Exterior, Non-Immersion and Interior Wet Location
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP1 and SSPC SP7
1st Coat: Interseal 670HS
2nd Coat: Interthane 990 Series
4.0 - 6.0
3.0 - 4.0
7.0 -10.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP1 and SSPC SP7
1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
09/02/15
4.0 – 6.0
Field Painting
09900-21
2992/60270
2nd Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
3.0 – 4.0
6.0 – 10.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP1 and SSPC SP7
1st Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2nd Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2.
4.0 - 6.0
4.0 - 6.0
8.0 - 12.0
Exterior, Below Grade
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Clean and Dry
1st Coat: Intertuf 16
16.0 -20.0
16.0 -20.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry
1st Coat: Hi-Mil Sher Tar Epoxy, B69B40/B60V40
16.0 – 20.0
16.0 -20.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: Clean and Dry
1st Coat:
1st Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2nd Coat: 46N Hi-Build Tneme-Tar
3.
3.0 – 5.0
16.0 – 20.0
16.0 -20.0
Interior, Non-Immersion - Average Performance
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
1st Coat: Interseal 670HS
2nd Coat: Intergard 475HS
09/02/15
3.0 - 5.0
4.0 - 6.0
7.0 -11.0
Field Painting
09900-22
2992/60270
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
2nd Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,
B58-600/B58V600
3.0 – 5.0
4.0 – 6.0
7.0 – 11.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6
1st Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2nd Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
4.
3.0 - 5.0
4.0 - 6.0
7.0 -11.0
Interior, Immersion, Non-Potable
International
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
1st Coat: Interseal 670HS
2nd Coat: Interseal 670HS
3rd Coat: Interseal 670HS
3.0 - 5.0
4.0 - 6.0
4.0 - 6.0
11.0 -17.0
The Sherwin Williams Company
D.F.T. (3)
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
1st Coat: Dura-Plate 235 Multi-Purpose Epoxy,
B67-235/B67V235
2nd Coat: Dura-Plate 235 Multi-Purpose Epoxy,
B67-235/B67V235
3rd Coat: Dura-Plate 235 Multi-Purpose Epoxy,
B67-235/B67V235
3.0 – 5.0
4.0 – 6.0
4.0 – 6.0
11.0 -17.0
Tnemec
D.F.T. (3)
09/02/15
Field Painting
09900-23
2992/60270
Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10
1st Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
2nd Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
3rd Coat: N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II
3.6
COLOR CODED AND MARKED PIPING
A.
3.7
All exposed piping shall be painted, color coded, and marked as scheduled.
1.
Piping in exposed trenches shall be considered exposed.
2.
Markers shall be of an all temperature adhesive tape, suitable for any pipe finish
or covering.
3.
Printing on markers shall be of sufficient size and style as reviewed by Engineer.
4.
A flow arrow shall be installed with each pipe marker at a minimum spacing of
10 ft.
5.
Where two colors do not have sufficient contrast to easily differentiate between
them, a six-inch band of contrasting color shall be on one of the pipes at 30 inch
intervals.
B.
On fiberglass, plastic, stainless steel, copper pipe, or other uncoated piping, a
combination of wide banding tape and narrow banding tape shall be used for the pipe
color and band.
C.
Labels and markings for specific pipe services are specified in the Section entitled
“Mechanical Identification”.
PIPING COLOR CODE
A.
Water Lines
Raw
Olive Green
Settled or Clarified
Aqua
Finished or Potable
Dark Blue
B.
09/02/15
3.0 - 5.0
4.0 - 6.0
4.0 - 6.0
11.0 -17.0
Chemical Lines
Alum or Primary Coagulant
Orange
Ammonia
White
Carbon Slurry
Black
Caustic
Yellow with Green Band
Chlorine (Gas and Solution)
Yellow
Field Painting
09900-24
2992/60270
Chlorine Dioxide
Yellow with Violet Band
Fluoride
Light Blue with Red Band
Lime Slurry
Light Green
Ozone
Yellow with Orange Band
Phosphate Compounds
Light Green with Red Band
Polymers or Coagulant Aids
Orange with Green Band
Sodium Bisulfite
Light Purple
Sodium Hydroxide
Light Purple with Yellow Band
Sodium Permanganate
Violet
Soda Ash
Light Green with Orange Band
Sulfuric Acid
Yellow with Red Band
Sulfur Dioxide
Light Green with Yellow Band
C.
Waste Lines
Backwash Waste
Light Brown
Sludge
Dark Brown
Sewer (Sanitary or Other)
Dark Gray
D.
Other
Compressed Air
Dark Green
Gas
Red
Other Lines
Light Gray
*****
09/02/15
Field Painting
11286-1
2992/60270
SECTION 11286
STAINLESS STEEL HYDRAULIC GATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes stainless steel slide gates complete with all appurtenances, as
indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Gates shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
B.
All materials furnished under this Section shall be furnished by manufacturers who
have at least five years experience in the design, production, assembly, and field
service of units of like type, size, and materials.
C.
References
Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the
following codes, standards and specifications, except where more stringent
requirements have been specified herein:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
American Water Works Association (AWWA)
American Welding Society (AWS)
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
D.
Welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS standards.
E.
Gates and operators shall be furnished with all necessary parts and accessories; and
shall be fabricated, assembled and placed in proper operating condition in
accordance with installation instructions and recommendations of the equipment
manufacturer.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings
1.
09/02/15
In addition to those submittals identified elsewhere, the following items shall
also be submitted:
a.
Compliance Statement: Submit manufacturer’s certification that the
equipment submitted is in compliance with all sections of this
specification.
b.
Shop drawings, including dimensions, material of construction, size
and location of connections to other work, and weight of equipment.
Stainless Steel Hydraulic Gates
11286-2
2992/60270
c.
Catalog information and cuts.
d.
Complete manufacturer's specifications, including materials
description and lubricant requirements.
e.
Suggested spare parts list with current price information.
f.
List of special tools required for checking, testing, parts
replacement, and maintenance. Special tools are those which have
been specially designed or adapted for use on parts of the
equipment, and which are not customarily and routinely carried by
maintenance mechanics.
g.
List of special tools furnished with the equipment.
h.
Special handling instructions.
i.
Requirements for storage and protection prior to installation.
j.
Manufacturer's installation recommendations.
k.
Requirements for routine maintenance required prior to startup.
l.
Calculations demonstrating lift loads and deflection signed and
sealed by a registered PE.
2.
1.5
Submit a coordination list that identifies each gate. The coordination list
shall include project specific information such as tag numbers, gate type,
size, and application.
B.
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals specific to the equipment supplied in
accordance with this specification.
C.
Submit Manufacturer’s Certificate of proper installation.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Materials and equipment shall be boxed, crated or otherwise completely enclosed and
protected during shipment, handling, and storage. Such boxes, crates or protection
shall be clearly labeled with manufacturer's name, brand or model designation, type
or grade and color.
B.
Protect materials and equipment from exposure to the elements and keep dry at all
times. Handle and store to prevent damage in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
C.
Material and equipment damaged by handling and storage shall be repaired or
replaced by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer.
09/02/15
Stainless Steel Hydraulic Gates
11286-3
2992/60270
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Gates and appurtenances shall be provided with manufacturer’s warranty of not less
than two (2) years from date of final acceptance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Stainless Steel Gates are the design basis for this Project. The following
manufacturers are named to establish a standard of quality necessary for the Project:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
2.3
2.4
Fontaine
WACO Products Inc.
Waterman Industries
Or equal
GENERAL
A.
Furnish and install stainless steel gates with frames and accessories suitable for high
humidity and corrosive conditions.
B.
Stainless steel gates shall be suitable for service in drinking water treatment plant raw
water.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Gates shall be designed for the indicated seating and unseating heads.
B.
Gates shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C561 unless more strict
requirements have been specified herein.
C.
Materials of construction shall be suitable for the environment.
D.
Slide Gate
1.
Gates shall be substantially watertight under the design head conditions.
Leakage shall not exceed 0.05 U.S. gallon per minute per foot seal periphery
under the design seating head and unseating head.
2.
The slide gates shall be designed to withstand the maximum design head
(maximum design head shall be taken as the height of the slide unless
otherwise shown in the schedule).
3.
The gate’s sealing system should have been tested through a cycle test in an
abrasive environment and should show that the leakage requirements are still
obtained after 25,000 cycles with a minimum deterioration.
MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
09/02/15
Stainless Steel Hydraulic Gates
11286-4
2992/60270
A.
Frames shall be 304L stainless steel.
B.
Slide Gates
C.
09/02/15
1.
Gates shall be either self-contained or non self-contained of the rising stem
or non-rising configuration as indicated on the gate schedule.
2.
The gate frame shall be constructed of structural members or formed plate.
The frame shall be suitable for mounting on a concrete wall (CW) at the end
of a channel, embedded inside a channel (FE) or mounted on the channel
surface (EC). The guide slot shall be of UHMWPE (ultra high molecular
weight polyethylene). The frame configuration shall be of the flush-bottom
type.
3.
The slide shall consist of a flat plate reinforced with formed plates or
structural members to limit its deflection to 1/720 of the gate's span under
the design head.
4.
The guides shall be made of UHMWPE (ultra high molecular weight
polyethylene) and shall be of such length as to retain and support at least two
thirds (2/3) of the vertical height of the slide in the fully open position.
5.
Side and top seals shall be made of UHMWPE (ultra high molecular weight
polyethylene) of the self-adjusting type. A continuous compression cord
shall ensure contact between the UHMWPE guide and the gate in all
positions. The sealing system shall maintain efficient sealing in any position
of the slide and allow the water to flow only in the opened part of the gate.
6.
Seals shall maintain the specified leakage rate in both seating and unseating
conditions. The bottom seal shall be made of resilient neoprene set into the
bottom member of the frame and shall form a flush-bottom.
Stems
1.
Stems and extensions shall be entirely of Type 304 Stainless steel.
2.
The sections of extension stems shall be joined together by solid couplings,
threaded and keyed to the stems. All couplings of the same size shall be
interchangeable.
3.
Stems shall be furnished with adjustable, bronze bushed stem guides, spaced
as necessary to maintain a slenderness ratio L/R of less than 200.
4.
Stems shall be of ample cross section to prevent distortion and shall have
stub acme threads.
5.
Stems shall be designed to withstand tensile and compressive loads that
occur under maximum operating conditions. Design for compressive loading
shall meet AISC code where K=1 with a minimum safety factor of 2 to 1.
Stainless Steel Hydraulic Gates
11286-5
2992/60270
2.5
6.
Stems shall be cold rolled or machine cut with a double start stub acme
thread and a finish of 32 microns or less.
7.
Stem shall be fixed to the disc by a threaded and keyed assembly into a
lifting nut, attached to the disc in a lifting bracket which is bolted to the disc.
8.
Gates and stems shall be threaded for opening in direction scheduled herein.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Motorized Actuators
1.
General
a.
Motorized actuators shall be open-close duty, as shown on the
Drawings.
b.
Acceptable Manufacturers
1)
2)
3)
2.
c.
Actuators shall include the motor, motor starter, actuator unit
gearing, operator controls, position limit switches, torque switches,
declutch lever, and handwheel, as a self-contained unit. Components
and accessories shall be provided by a single source manufacturer.
d.
Electric actuators shall be compatible with the gate/valve operating
shafts. Electric actuators shall be multi-turn, suitable for each
specific gate/valve application, and sized to meet the torque
requirements of each gate/valve being served.
e.
Electric actuator mounting configurations shall be coordinated with
each gate/valve application. Provide mounting bases and drive
output couplings as required to interface with each gate/valve.
f.
Actuators shall be factory-wired requiring only connections of power
supply, control circuits, and remote control stations where
applicable.
g.
Electric Actuators shall meet the latest revision of the applicable
AWWA Standard C540-87
Actuator Sizing
a.
09/02/15
Limitorque Corp.
EIM
Rotork
The actuator shall be sized to allow gate/valve closure at the
required differential pressures. The safety margin of motor power
available for seating and unseating the gate/valve shall be sufficient
to ensure torque switch trip at maximum gate/valve torque with the
supply voltage 10% below nominal.
Stainless Steel Hydraulic Gates
11286-6
2992/60270
b.
3.
Electric Actuator Construction
a.
b.
09/02/15
Electric actuators shall be sized to fully open or close each
gate/valve in a period of time no greater than 120 seconds.
The motor, gearing, controls and auxiliary components shall be
housed in a NEMA 4, 4X, and 6P enclosure, with a corrosionresistant finish.
Gear Reduction
1)
Electric actuators shall be furnished with gear reduction as
required per each specific gate/valve application. Gears shall
be machine cut, ground and highly polished. Shafts shall be
heat-treated steel. The output or driving shaft shall operate in
bronze bearings or in ball or roller bearings.
2)
The actuator gearing shall be totally enclosed in oil or grease
filled gearcase to permit the actuator to be mounted and
operated in any position. The gearcase shall be constructed to
allow field inspection without taking the gate/valve out of
service.
3)
Combined gear ratio shall ensure “self-locking” characteristics
at all times and shall be of sufficiently high ratio as to inhibit
“back driving” the actuator. ”
c.
Drive Bushing
1)
The actuator shall be provided with a drive bushing easily
detachable for machining to suit the gate/valve stem or
gearbox input shaft. Thrust bearings when required shall be
housed in a separate thrust base and be a sealed for life design.
d.
Handwheel Operator
1)
Each actuator shall be provided with a handwheel operator and
declutch lever. The declutch lever shall disengage the motor
operator and engage the handwheel operator such that the
gate/valve can be open and closed manually. Handwheels
shall be so designed that the motor does not turn when the
handwheel is engaged and automatically disengages when the
motor is energized. Handwheels shall be sized adequate to
manually operate with handwheel effort not exceeding 80
pounds. The handwheel operator clutch mechanism shall be
designed to permit padlocking in both the engaged and
disengaged positions.
2)
It should be possible to select manual operation while the
actuator is running or start the actuator motor while the lever is
in manual without damage to the drive train.
3)
The handwheel drive shall be mechanically independent of the
motor drive, and gearing shall permit emergency manual
operation in a reasonable time.
4)
A clockwise rotation of the handwheel shall provide a
clockwise rotation of the output drive sleeve.
Stainless Steel Hydraulic Gates
11286-7
2992/60270
4.
09/02/15
e.
Motor and Motor Protection
1)
Electric motors shall be 460 volts three-phase, squirrel cage
induction type, specifically designed for gate/valve actuator
service. The motors shall be TENV (totally-enclosed nonventilated) construction.
2)
Electric motors shall be low inertia, high torque type, and with
Class F or H insulation with a Class B temperature rise.
3)
Overload protection shall be by means of inherent motor
thermal sensors embedded in the motor windings.
4)
Torque protection reset shall not allow repeated starting in the
same direction while the control signal is maintained.
5)
Three-phase motors shall be protected against single phasing
and shall be provided with automatic phase correction.
f.
Mechanical Position Indicator
1)
Actuators shall be provided with a local mechanical position
indicator or lever which shall track the gate/valve position and
provide a visual reference, requiring no electric components.
The mechanical position indicator shall be colored red and
located on each gate/valve in a position where it can be easily
viewed from a minimum of 6 feet away.
g.
Space Heaters
1)
Electric actuators shall be provided with space heaters to
minimize condensation build-up inside the actuator enclosures.
The actuator shall be provided appropriate power supply and
controls for powering and controlling the space heaters.
Separate dedicated power supplies shall not be required.
h.
Torque Sensing
1)
Each actuator shall be provided with both open and close
torque protection. A microprocessor shall calculate the output
torque from motor speed, voltage, and temperature. Torque
limit shall be set from 40-100% of rating in 1% increments.
The torque sensor shall not monitor the starting sequences of
the actuator during initial gate/valve unseating.
Controls
a.
Controls
1)
Electrical controls shall include reversing motor starters,
control power transformers and integral control stations which
shall be provided with each actuator.
2)
Motor starters shall be suitable for a minimum of 60 starts per
hour, and shall be rated for the motor size.
Stainless Steel Hydraulic Gates
11286-8
2992/60270
3)
Electric actuators shall include provisions for interfacing with
remote control, dry contact input signals for remote
OPEN/STOP/CLOSE operation of the actuator. Remote
signals shall be momentary, dry type contacts.
4)
Electric actuators shall be provided with integral control
stations which shall include the following features:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Local-Off-Remote Selector Switch (with provisions
for pad-locking in any position). Selector switch shall
be provided with one extra contact for remote
monitoring of the selector switch “remote” position.
Contacts shall be factory wired to terminal blocks to
facilitate field wiring connections.
Open-Stop-Close Pushbuttons (Momentary)
Open "RED" Indicating Light
Closed "GREEN" Indicating Light
Open and Closed indicating lights shall be
energized when the electric actuator is in the
respective “Full Open” or “Full Closed” positions.
The indicating lights shall both be energized when
the electric actuator is in between the “Full Open”
and “Full Closed” positions.
e)
5)
Four auxiliary limit switches shall be provided and shall be
geared and fully adjustable to trip at any point between fully
opened and fully closed. These limit switches shall be
provided in addition to limit switches required for the integral
gate/valve controls. The auxiliary limit switches shall be
factory set; 2 at fully closed position and 2 at fully open
position. Limit switch contacts shall be factory wired to
terminal blocks to facilitate field wiring connections.
6)
The actuator shall be provided with integral torque overload
protection.
7)
The actuator shall be provided with integral diagnostic
capabilities for monitoring the actuator operating conditions.
The actuator provided with a common alarm relay output
which shall monitor the following alarm functions as a
minimum.
a)
b)
c)
09/02/15
The actuator shall be provided with a digital position
indicator located on the actuator control panel.
Gate/Valve Jammed
Motor Over-temperature
Motor Over-torque
Stainless Steel Hydraulic Gates
11286-9
2992/60270
d)
e)
f)
b.
1)
Lost Phase (three-phase operators only)
No analog signal
Hardware failure
Open-Close Actuator Input/Output Summary
Each electric actuator shall accommodate the following input and
output wiring connections.
Parameter
LOR Switch in Remote:
Remote Close
Remote Open
Gate/Valve Open
Gate/Valve Closed
Common Alarm:
C.
Discrete Output – Common alarm for any
gate/valve malfunction.
Anchor Bolts and Hardware
1.
2.6
Discrete Output
Discrete Input
Discrete Input
Discrete Output (Position Adjustable)
Discrete Output (Position Adjustable)
All necessary attaching bolts, anchor bolts, mounting and assembly hardware
shall be of Type 316 stainless steel and shall be furnished by the gate
manufacturer.
SCHEDULE
A.
Provide stainless steel gates as indicated in the Contract Documents and scheduled
below.
Style
Location
Gate Frame Mounting
Opening
Direction
Dimensions
W x H/Dia.
Operator
Mounting
Head
Conditions
Slide
Gate
Non-self
contained
Distribution Wet Well
Wall Face side, Flat back
Up, Rising Stem
24"x48"
Floor
Stand,
Electric
Operator
20’ Seating
/ Unseating
Open Frame
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations and in conformance with the Contract Documents.
B.
Prepare concrete mounting surfaces for installation of gates.
PAINTING
09/02/15
Stainless Steel Hydraulic Gates
11286-10
2992/60270
3.3
A.
With the exception of those parts and components customarily furnished unpainted,
all non-stainless steel metal surfaces shall be shop prepared and coated with rust
inhibitive shop paint. Shop paint shall be fully compatible with the field paint
specified.
B.
Machined surfaces shall be protected against damage and corrosion by other means.
C.
Perform field painting in accordance with the Section entitled "Field Painting".
FIELD TESTING
A.
After installation, the Contractor shall operate all gates to show they operate without
binding or strain.
B.
Any deficiencies shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense.
C.
Gates shall be tested under active operating conditions for a minimum of two (2)
hours.
1.
Ensure leakage rate past seated gate does not exceed 0.05 gpm/ft of wetted
perimeter.
2.
Verify proper operation of gate operators.
a.
b.
c.
3.
Verify the following for each gate:
a.
b.
c.
D.
Unseat seated gate and run full-open.
Fully seat open gate.
Perform cycle a minimum of five (5) times.
Gate deflection is less than specified.
Stem deflection is less than specified.
Gate warpage/crowning is less than specified.
Defective components shall be replaced or repaired and retested at no additional cost
to the Owner.
********
09/02/15
Stainless Steel Hydraulic Gates
15050-1
2992/60270
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
1.3
This Section includes requirements for basic mechanical materials and methods. It
applies to all sections of Division 15 and to other sections that include mechanical
equipment requirements except when in the individual sections, requirements are
otherwise specified. Mechanical systems shall be complete including all miscellaneous
materials, and ready for operation as indicated in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide materials and equipment which are the standard
products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such materials and
equipment. Provide the manufacturer's latest standard design that conforms to these
Specifications. When two or more units of the same class of equipment are required,
these units shall be the products of the same manufacturer.
B.
Where materials and equipment are specified to meet requirements of the standards or
organizations such as Underwriters Laboratories (UL), American Society for Mechanical
Engineers (ASME), American Gear Manufacturer's Association (AGMA), American Gas
Association (AGA), Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) and American
Refrigeration Institute (ARI), that use a label or listing as a method of indicating
compliance, such label or listing shall be attached to the material or equipment when
delivered to the contract site.
C.
Comply with requirements of the National Fire Protection Association and Sheet Metal
and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association as directly related to material and
workmanship.
D.
Welding shall be performed by certified welders in accordance with AWS for the types of
welding required on the Work.
E.
Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in
equipment shall conform to AISC standards and structural members shall be designed for
appropriate shock and vibratory loads. Unless otherwise specified, steel which will be all
or partially submerged during operation of equipment shall be at least 1/4 inch thick.
SUBMITTALS
A.
09/02/15
Submit the following Contractor's Drawings in accordance with the Contract documents:
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
15050-2
2992/60270
1.4
1.
Shop drawings including descriptive and published details concerning
performance, capacity and noise ratings for each piece of equipment. For
electrical motor driven equipment include schematic drawing showing
coordination with electrical system and provide rated horsepower, full load
current requirements and, in addition for electric motors 3/4 horsepower and
larger, provide temperature rating, locked rotor current, power factor at full and
3/4 load, efficiency at full load and rated operation condition, type of bearings,
lubrication requirements and net weight.
2.
Catalog data for materials other than equipment that are manufacturer's standard
products.
3.
Scaled mechanical layout drawings showing dimensioned plan views and
elevations of mechanical equipment; equipment mounting and foundations
including anchoring details; piping and valves including support detail; and
components including space requirements, coordination with building features
and other work.
4.
Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation; handling and
storage; and cleaning and maintenance of equipment and materials during storage
and prior to initial energizing.
5.
For field welding, submit evidence that each welder is certified for the type of
welding required for the work in accordance with AWS.
B.
Submit operation and maintenance manuals for each mechanical system and specific
pieces of equipment according to the General and Supplementary Conditions.
C.
Shop drawings and O&M manuals shall be provided in both hard-copy and PDF format
as noted in the specifications.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Materials and equipment shall be boxed, crated or otherwise completely enclosed and
protected during shipment, handling, and storage. Such boxes, crates or protection shall
be clearly labeled with manufacturer's name, brand or model designation, type or grade
and color. Complete packing lists and bills for material shall be included with each
shipment. Each item of equipment shall be tagged or marked with the same identification
number or mark as shown on the packing lists and bills of material.
B.
Protect materials and equipment from exposure to the elements and keep dry at all times.
Handle and store to prevent damage and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
C.
Insulation, controls and electrical equipment shall be protected from moisture and water
damage. Pumps, motors, electrical and other equipment with antifriction or sleeve
bearings shall be stored in weathertight areas maintained at a temperature above 60
degrees F. Space heaters furnished in equipment shall be connected during storage and
operated continuously.
09/02/15
Basic Mechanical and Material Methods
15050-3
2992/60270
D.
1.5
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
Provide safe working space around equipment.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
1.8
The Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of equipment, piping and
valves. Equipment shall fit in the space allotted and allow adequate clearance for entry,
installation, replacement, servicing and maintenance. Actual and final arrangement,
location, grades and elevations of equipment, appurtenances, piping and valves shall be
verified by the Contractor before ordering material and equipment. If adjustments and
modifications are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such adjustments and
modifications and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval as
soon as practicable but not later than with the submittal of the scaled mechanical layout
drawings. No adjustments or modifications shall be made without the Engineer's written
approval.
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.7
Equipment and material shall not have rust, pitting, decay or other deleterious affects
from storage and handling when installed in the work. Material and equipment showing
such effects or damage shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor as directed by the
Engineer.
Sequencing and scheduling of mechanical work shall be coordinated with other related
parts of the Work including verification that all piping, wiring, conduits and equipment
components are compatible.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Maintenance materials in the form of spare parts and extra material, if required, will be
specified in the specific Specification Section for equipment or materials.
1.
Spare parts listed to be furnished shall be packed in wooden boxes, labeled with
the manufacturer's name, address and telephone number; local representative's
name, address and telephone number; name of equipment the parts are for and
list of parts contained therein. All spare parts for all mechanical specification
Sections and all Sections that contain mechanical equipment shall be packed for
long term storage.
B.
Extra material shall be packed in strong cartons, labeled with manufacturer's name,
material name, type, color and location material was installed.
C.
Store maintenance material in a location directed by the Engineer.
09/02/15
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
15050-4
2992/60270
1.9
MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
A.
Manufacturers of furnished equipment shall provide qualified field representatives to
provide manufacturer's services as required during installation, start up, and testing and to
instruct plant staff on proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. Field
representatives shall be available to observe, instruct, guide and direct the Contractor's
handling, installation, start up and adjustment procedures of the equipment.
Manufacturer's services shall be provided as follows:
1.
Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions but
shall not be energized or operated until a field representative of the manufacturer
has inspected the installation and is available on the site to supervise the
equipment start up.
2.
Prior to and during the required tests, a field representative shall be available to
operate and adjust the equipment to perform in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
3.
When required in the specification sections for the valves, provide competent
factory trained service and operating personnel to instruct plant personnel in the
operation and maintenance of the equipment. Instruction sessions shall be
conducted at times and locations as approved by the Engineer.
PART 2 - MATERIAL
2.1
2.2
GENERAL
A.
In the design and supply of equipment, provide for interchangeability of parts and items
for equipment, piping, motors and other appurtenances.
B.
Factory assemble, coat and paint valves as much as is practicable before shipping and
handling. A factory applied prime coat is a minimum coating requirement.
C.
Each major component of equipment shall have a metal nameplate attached, showing as a
minimum manufacturer's name, address and equipment model number.
ANCHOR BOLTS
A.
Provide stainless steel anchor bolts, nuts and washers, type 304 as indicated on the
Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, size anchor bolts to the largest diameter that will
pass through the bolt holes of the equipment base. Length of the bolts shall be long
enough to permit a minimum of one inch of grout beneath the base plate and a minimum
of three inches anchorage or ten times the diameter (whichever is greater) into the
structural concrete.
B.
Provide anchor bolts, nuts and washers together with template or setting drawing
sufficiently in advance to permit anchor bolts to be set either prior to or during structural
concrete placement.
09/02/15
Basic Mechanical and Material Methods
15050-5
2992/60270
2.3
SUPPORTS AND BRACES
A.
2.4
BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS
A.
2.5
Bolts, nuts and washers shall be steel meeting ASTM A193, ASTM A194 and ANSI
B18.22.1. Nuts shall be cold pressed. Bolts, nuts and threads shall be American
Standard sizes. Ferrous bolts, nuts and washers, except those used for flanged pipe,
valves, fittings and equipment connections or otherwise noted, shall be hot dip galvanized
or zinc plated.
SHOP PAINTING
A.
2.6
Provide supports and braces fabricated as specified or indicated on the Drawings.
Surface prepare and shop coat equipment, supports, piping and appurtenances as
specified in Section 09900 and as shown on the Drawings except connecting ends and
where it would hinder installation. These points shall be shop primed and field painted
after installation. Shop primer shall be compatible with field coat.
SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Provide special tools, instruments and accessories when required to adjust, maintain or
repair equipment. Equipment requiring special devices for lifting and handling shall be
furnished complete with these devices.
B.
Unions screwed or flanged shall be provided where indicated and in the following
locations even if not indicated.
1.
In long runs of piping to permit convenient disassembly for alterations or repairs.
2.
In by-passes around equipment.
3.
In connections to tanks, pumps and other equipment between the shut-off valve
and the equipment.
4.
In connections on both sides of traps, controls and automatic control valves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Inspect area and surfaces to receive piping, valves and appurtenances and verify that
areas are ready for installation. Before installation, repair defects and damaged area, and
adjust surfaces and areas so they are ready for proper installation.
B.
Field measure area to be occupied by piping, valves and appurtenances and verify space
is adequate and in accordance with approved Contractor's Drawings. If adjustment is
required obtain approval of Engineer and adjust as approved.
09/02/15
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
15050-6
2992/60270
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Equipment and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with Manufacturer's
instructions. Provide complete final connections to equipment, including pipe, electric
and controls.
B.
Highpoints in piping shall be provided with manual vents and low points in fluid piping
provided with drain valves fitted for hose adapters. Rises and drops as required by field
conditions shall be provided.
C.
Install appropriate unions for maintenance.
FOUNDATIONS, BASES AND SUPPORTS
A.
3.4
Electrical conduits, piping and valves shall be supported by providing compatible frames,
braces, hangers and anchors.
LUBRICATION
Equipment shall be lubricated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for the initial
operation. Following testing and prior to final acceptance relubricate, if directed.
3.5
3.6
3.7
SURFACE TOUCH UP/FIELD PAINTING
A.
Touch up surfaces where shop coats have been damaged using paint, coatings and film
thickness identical to original shop coats.
B.
Clean field installed bolts, nuts, washers and support systems. Paint or coat identical to
original shop coat and/or surrounding area.
C.
Field paint as specified in Section 09900 and as shown on Drawings.
PROTECT AND CLEAN
A.
Protect equipment during and after installation from construction dust and debris. Provide
temporary protection as required until equipment is in operation or receipt of Certificate
of Substantial Completion.
B.
Clean equipment, surrounding area and ductwork inside and out. Replace filters on air
handling equipment.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
09/02/15
Demonstrate and test the operation of the various systems and equipment for specified
requirements in the presence of the Engineer as specified in the specific sections for the
equipment.
Basic Mechanical and Material Methods
15050-7
2992/60270
B.
3.8
Make adjustments and replace defective equipment and parts, as required.
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
After the various systems have passed the field quality control requirements and prior to
Certificate of Substantial Completion provide Manufacturer's services for operation and
maintenance as specified in the specific sections for the equipment.
*****
09/02/15
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Page Intentionally Left Blank
15075-1
2992/60270
SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Pipe Identification Painting.
B.
Pipe Identification Markers and Tags.
C.
Valve Identification.
REFERENCES
A.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1.
1.3
ANSI A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
SUBMITTALS
A.
For each product specified submit manufacturer’s catalog sheets and specifications
showing its compliance with this specification and the referenced standards.
B.
Submit, for review, samples of symbols and abbreviations, letter size, color for coding,
and a complete list of legend wording proposed for mechanical identification. Do not
order or purchase identification materials until samples have been reviewed.
C.
Quality Control Submittals
1.
2.
D.
Contract Closeout Submittals
1.
09/02/15
Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Submit, for review, sample format for valve service identification chart(s)
containing (as a minimum) the following information:
a.
Valve tag number.
b.
Valve location.
c.
Valve function and service.
d.
Valve manufacturer’s name and model number.
Submit final valve service identification chart(s), framed as specified below.
Mechanical Identification
15075-2
2992/60270
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Identifying labels and markings for piping shall conform to ANSI A13.1 for legend,
color, visibility, and size of legend and letters.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Complete all testing, insulation, and finish painting prior to executing the Work of this
Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Seton Identification Company, Branford, Connecticut.
B.
Brady Corporation, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
C.
Engineer approved Equal
MATERIALS
A.
B.
09/02/15
Pipe Identification Painting
1.
Type: As identified in Section 09900 entitled “Field Painting.”
2.
Color: As scheduled in Paragraph 3.1.
Pipe Identification Markers:
1.
Snap-On Type: Precoiled acrylic plastic marker with clear polyester coating,
incorporating flow arrows, and legend printed in alternate directions.
a.
Piping or insulation under 6 inch O.D.: One piece wrap around type with
3/4 inch adhesive strip on inside edge and 360 degree visibility.
b.
Piping or insulation 6 inch O.D. and larger: Strip type with factory
applied grommets, secure with stainless steel spring fasteners.
2.
Stick-On Type: One piece pressure sensitive adhesive backed plastic marker
with clear polyester coating, incorporating flow arrows, and legend printed in
alternate directions.
a.
Piping or insulation under 8 inch O.D.: Wrap around type with 360
degree visibility.
b.
Piping or insulation 8 inch O.D. and larger: Strip type.
3.
Markers shall be color coded based on pipe contents. Color selection shall be
according to chart in Part 3 of this Section.
Mechanical Identification
15075-3
2992/60270
C.
Pipe Banding Tape:
1.
D.
E.
2.3
1-1/2 inch width (minimum), pressure sensitive adhesive backed type, of same
material as pipe identification marker, and of color to match background color of
pipe identification marker.
Pipe Service Identification Tags:
1.
Type: Brass, 19 B&S gage, with 1/4 inch high pipe service abbreviated lettering
over 2-inch high pipe size lettering. Lettering shall be deep stamped and black
filled. Tag to have 3/16 inch diameter hole at top for fastening.
2.
Size: 2 inch square tag.
3.
Fasteners: Brass “S” hook or brass jack chain, size as required for pipe to which
tag is attached.
4.
Tags and fasteners shall not interfere with the proper operation of the valve.
Valve Identification Tags:
1.
Type: Brass, 19 B&S gage, with 1/4 inch high valve service abbreviated
lettering over 2-inch high lettering indicating valve service chart number.
Lettering shall be deep stamped and black filled. Tag to have 3/16 inch diameter
hole at top for fastening.
2.
Size:
a.
b.
Utilities: 1-1/2 inch diameter round tag.
Plumbing: 1-1/2 inch hexagon tag.
3.
Fasteners: Brass “S” hook or brass jack chain, size as required for valve stem or
handle to which tag is attached.
4.
Tags and fasteners shall not interfere with the proper operation of the valve.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Valve Service Identification Chart Frames:
1.
Satin finished extruded aluminum frame of size to fit 8-1/2 x 11 inch valve chart
and complete with rigid clear plastic glazing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPE IDENTIFICATION PAINTING
A.
09/02/15
General
Mechanical Identification
15075-4
2992/60270
B.
1.
Piping within areas designated below shall be painted with various colors to
identify the contents.
2.
Paint color shall be in accordance with the Pipe Painting Color Code Schedule
found in Paragraph E, below.
3.
If the piping is insulated, then the insulation cover shall be painted and not the
pipe. EXCEPTION: Do not paint metal insulation jackets, regardless of
location.
Areas for Pipe Identification Painting:
1.
C.
D.
Application of Paint:
1.
Prepare and paint designated piping and/or insulation in accordance with Section
09900 entitled “Field Painting.”
2.
Coverage of designated piping or insulation shall be complete and free of
streaking of defects.
Cleaning:
1.
E.
3.2
Piping within the following spaces or rooms shall be painted:
a.
Exposed piping in corridors or other finished spaces which does not have
a metal insulation jacket.
Clean adjacent surfaces of paint spatters and drips resulting form the Work of
this Section.
Pipe Painting Color Code Schedule: Refer to Section 09900 entitled “Field Painting.”
PIPE IDENTIFICATION MARKERS AND TAGS
A.
09/02/15
General:
1.
Piping shall be identified as to content and direction of flow by use of pipe
identification markers or tags.
2.
Identify all piping, bare or insulated, whose contents match those listed in the
Pipe Identification Schedule (Paragraph F, below), with the following
exceptions:
a.
Piping in furred spaces or above plastered ceilings, except at access
panels where valves and piping shall be identified as specified for
exposed piping.
b.
Piping in finished spaces such as offices, toilet rooms, locker rooms, etc.
Mechanical Identification
15075-5
2992/60270
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.
Marker legend size, field color, and length of field shall be in accordance with
ANSI A13.1.
4.
Legend wording shall be developed by the Contractor and submitted for review
(see Section 1.4,C). Whenever possible, standard terminology should be used.
Identification by the combination of two or more standard labels (at each
identification point) is acceptable.
Use of Markers or Tags:
1.
Pipe or insulation with an outside diameter (O.D.) of 3/4 inch and less shall be
identified by the use of Pipe Service Identification Tags.
2.
Pipe or insulation with an O.D. larger than 3/4 inch shall be identified by the use
of Pipe Identification Markers.
3.
Either snap-on or stick-on type markers may be used; except that stick-on
markers shall not be used in the following situations:
a.
Areas where humid, wet, or dripping conditions are found or likely.
b.
Areas where chemical fumes are present or likely.
c.
Outdoor installations.
d.
On lines subject to 50 degree F temperature variations.
Location of Markers and Tags:
1.
Pipe markers and tags shall be located so as to be readily visible from any
reasonable point of observation.
2.
Locate identification at all valves, branch or riser take-offs, and both sides of
pipe passage through walls, floors, and ceilings.
3.
On continuous pipe runs locate identification at 20 foot intervals, but not less
than one marker or tag on any length of 10 feet or greater.
Preparation:
1.
Insure that any painting is complete and the paint has thoroughly dried before
applying identification.
2.
Prepare surface in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for the type of
identification used and the surface to which it is applied.
Installation:
1.
2.
F.
09/02/15
Install markers and tags in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Secure both ends of stick-on type markers with 360 degree application of pipe
banding tape. Tape shall have one inch lap on pipe or insulation.
Pipe Identification Schedule: Identify the following types of piping with markers and/or
tags.
Mechanical Identification
15075-6
2992/60270
3.3
Pipe Service
Label Abbreviation
Background Color
Letter Color
Raw Water
RW
Olive Green
Black
VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A.
B.
C.
A.
General:
1.
Valves specified below shall be designated by distinguishing numbers and/or
letters.
2.
Where applicable, valve designation shall match (as closely as possible) the
designation found on the Contract Drawings.
Installation:
1.
Fasten tags to valve stems or handles using brass “S” hooks or jack chain.
2.
Fasten tags in a manner and location that will permit easy reading, but will not
interfere with the operation of the valve.
Valve Service Identification Chart:
1.
Provide two framed valve charts for each piping system to have valve
identification tags.
2.
Charts shall be typed, in the reviewed format (see 1.4D), on 8-1/2 x 11 inch
heavy white bond paper and framed in an aluminum frame.
3.
Hang framed charts at location(s) directed.
*****
09/02/15
Mechanical Identification
15115-1
2992/60270
SECTION 15115
WALL CASTINGS AND SLEEVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes wall castings and sleeves as shown on the Contract Drawings.
B.
Sleeves for electrical penetrations shall be as specified in Division 16.
SUBMITTALS
A.
In addition to those submittals identified in the Contract Documents, the following items
shall be submitted:
1.
Manufacturer's certification that all materials furnished are in compliance with
the applicable requirements of the referenced standards and this specification.
2.
Details of wall castings and sleeves.
3.
Layout drawings showing location and size of each wall penetration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2
Definitions
1.
Wall castings shall mean a casting or fabricated special into which a pipeline
terminates when passing through a foundation, wall or slab.
2.
Sleeve shall mean a casting or fabricated special inserted in the foundation, wall
or slab through which a pipeline passes.
3.
Finished area shall be defined as spaces scheduled to receive suspended ceilings
or otherwise noted “Finished Area” in the Room Finish Schedule.
MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A.
Wall castings shall be cast or ductile iron or stainless steel, and shall be of the
configuration as shown on the Contract Drawings.
B.
Sleeves shall be solid cast or ductile iron castings or fabricated from Schedule 40 steel
pipe.
09/15/15
Wall Castings and Sleeves
15115-2
2992/60270
C.
Wall castings and sleeves shall be provided with waterstops when installed in poured
concrete foundations, walls, slabs, and elsewhere as shown.
1.
Waterstops for fabricated sleeves shall be at least the same thickness as the
sleeve and a minimum of 2 inches in width.
a.
Attached by continuous filet weld both sides around the sleeve.
1)
MIG weld shall be used on cast or ductile iron.
b.
c.
2.
One waterstop for lengths up to and including 12 inches.
Two waterstops for lengths over 12 inches.
Waterstops for castings shall be the manufacturer's standard.
D.
Escutcheons for pipes up to and including 2 inches in diameter shall be chrome plated
brass.
E.
For pipes larger than 2 inches, stainless steel plates shall be used to cover the sleeve
opening.
F.
Sealants
1.
Modular link type wall seals as manufactured by Thunderline Corp. or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install wall castings and sleeves at the locations and elevations as shown on layout
drawings or Contract Drawings.
1.
Verify location with the installer of the carrier pipe before concrete is poured.
B.
Flanges on castings and sleeves installed in walls and ceilings shall extend a minimum of
six-inches beyond the face of the wall or ceiling, unless otherwise noted on the Contract
Drawings.
C.
Sleeves in floors shall be fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe.
1.
In areas not requiring escutcheons or plates the sleeve shall extend 4 inches
above finished floor.
D.
Sleeves installed in exterior walls, finished areas and where water or gas tightness is
required shall be sealed water and gas tight.
E.
Size
09/02/15
Wall Castings and Sleeves
15115-3
2992/60270
F.
1.
Wall castings shall be the size of the carrier pipe.
2.
Sleeves for modular link type wall seals shall be sized in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.
Sleeves for caulking shall be a minimum of one size larger than the carrier pipe.
4.
At "finished areas" diminish the size of covering, insulation, to permit smallest
size sleeve.
5.
Where pipes are to be insulated and water or gas tightness is not required, the
sleeve shall be sized to permit full insulation through the sleeve.
6.
Sealants shall be
recommendations.
installed
in
accordance
with
the
manufacturer's
Finished Areas
1.
Exposed sleeves in finished areas shall have escutcheons or plates of a size to
cover the sleeves.
*****
09/02/15
Wall Castings and Sleeves
Page Intentionally Left Blank
15122-1
2992/60270
SECTION 15122
MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND TRAPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This section includes the installation of a 36” v port valve manufactured by Lined Valve
Company, complete and operable as indicated on the Contract drawings and specified
herein. Contractor shall note that NJWSA has pre-purchased the valve. Contractor shall
be responsible for delivering the valve to the project site. NJWSA will deliver the valve
on a pallet to within 10’ from where the existing access hatch is to lower the valve.
Contractor shall provide NJWSA one day notice prior to pickup and delivery of the
valve.
B.
This Section also includes all valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller to be installed in pressure
and process pipelines and all special valves, traps, and appurtenances not specified
elsewhere as shown on the Contract Drawings.
C.
Valves 2-1/2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be solid brass, bronze, stainless steel, or
polyvinyl chloride as noted with screwed ends or with soldered joints or true union ends
where specified or shown.
D.
Unless otherwise specified, valves located in flanged piping shall have flanged ends.
E.
Unless otherwise specified, the interior surfaces of metal valves in contact during the
seating operation shall be either solid bronze or faced with bronze.
F.
Unless otherwise specified, valves shall be designed for 150 psi working pressure.
G.
Valves shall be equipped for nut, wrench, lever, or handwheel operation, as shown or
required and shall be equipped with extension stems, where necessary.
H.
All manually operated valves shall open by turning to the left (counterclockwise).
I.
All valves and traps of like type shall be the product of one manufacturer for the purpose
of parts interchangeability.
REFERENCES
A.
Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following
codes, standards and specifications, except where more stringent requirements have been
specified herein:
1.
09/25/15
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
Miscellaneous Valves and Traps
15122-2
2992/60270
2.
1.3
American Water Works Association (AWWA)
SUBMITTALS
A.
In addition to those submittals identified in the Contract Documents, the following items
shall also be submitted:
1.
Contractor’s Drawings:
a.
Prior to delivery of any valves, submit detail drawings and description of
each size valve including materials of construction and parts lists for
compliance with this specification.
b.
Shop Drawings for solenoid valves shall include wiring diagrams
showing field connection points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A.
B.
PVC Ball Valves
1.
Ball valves smaller than 1" shall be ITT-Grinnel or Asahi true union, or equal,
with EPDM O-rings and Teflon seats. Ball vales 1" and larger shall be ITTGrinnel or Asahi flanged model with split ring retainer. The Contractor shall
coordinate with the manufacturer regarding the compatibility of the fluid with the
O-ring material.
2.
Valves shall have full pipe area ports, and shall have flange connector pieces
with split ring retainer.
3.
Valves shall be lever operated.
Solenoid Valves
1.
C.
Tilting Float Switches
1.
09/25/15
Solenoid valve shall be packless construction 2-way and shall be normally
closed. Valve body shall be forged brass. The solenoid shall be rated for
continuous operation at 100 percent of rated voltage and shall be 120V AC, 60
Hertz operated. Coils and contacts shall be housed in NEMA 4 enclosure.
Solenoid valve shall be as manufactured by ASCO, Skinner, Magnetrol, or equal.
Tilting float level switches shall use the tilting movement of a float, whose
specific weight is less than that of the process fluid, to actuate switches as the
level changes. The switch(es) shall be integrally inputed in the float and
connected to a waterproof, 20-foot long electric cable. A movable weight shall be
mounted on the cable to allow adjustment of the setpoint(s). The float shall be
Miscellaneous Valves and Traps
15122-3
2992/60270
polyethylene, stainless steel, or other approved material. The tilting level float
valve shall be manufactured by Zi-Tech, Hydr-O-Matic, Flygt, or equal.
D.
PVC Check Valves
1.
E.
Corporation Stops
1.
F.
09/25/15
Ball PVC check valves and swing PVC check valves shall be Ashahi true union,
or equal, with PVC bodies and EPDM or Viton seats and seals. The Contractor
shall coordinate with the manufacturer to ensure that all valve parts are
compatible with the respective chemical solution.
Corporation stops shall be Mueller Type 110, or equal.
Unidirectional metal to metal seated 304 SS Knife Gate valve with V-port
1.
Valves shall be of the bonnetless knife gate valve type, rated for 125 PSI CWP.
Flanges shall be drilled and tapped to ASME B16.47, Class 150, Series A with
raised faces. Flange raised face machining shall be serrated-spiral or serratedconcentric grooves with a 125-250 RMS finish.
2.
Valve bodies shall be fabricated with 304 Stainless steel liners, raised faces and
wetted parts with carbon steel flanges, exterior stiffeners and packing gland.
3.
Valve shall have 304 SS gate and seat. Gate shall be of design and thickness to
withstand full 125 PSI rated pressure with out permanent deflection to the gate.
Gate shall have a square, beveled bottom. Seat and gate shall be machine
finished for tight one way shutoff with an oring seal and UHMW anti gall ring.
The seat shall also be fit with a V-Port orifice for modulation. Two gate wedges
shall be provided to assist seating of the gate against the seat in the lower half of
the valve body. Valve seat shall be fitted with a nitrile butadiene o-ring resilient
seat seal to provide zero seat leakage in the primary flow direction.
4.
Packing gland shall be fabricated carbon steel and shall have an adequate number
of gland bolts to provide an even tightening of the packing by the packing gland.
Packing shall be Teflon lubricated synthetic packing with a minimum of 4 rows
of packing. Packing gland bolts, studs and nuts shall be 304 stainless steel.
5.
Valve yoke shall be fabricated carbon steel. Valve stem shall be 304 Stainless
steel with full ACME threads. Stem nut shall be bronze. Stem nut retainer shall
be of the enclosed type and shall be ductile iron.
6.
Manually actuated valves shall be bevel gear operated with handwheel.
7.
Valves shall be designed, manufactured and tested to MSS SP-81 standard.
Miscellaneous Valves and Traps
15122-4
2992/60270
8.
All valves shall be lined valve company, Inc Fig 93 W4BVP knife gate valves or
equal. See attached cut sheet at the end of this section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
The installation of all valves shall be in accordance with the configuration shown on the
Contract Drawings and the Manufacturer’s recommendations.
PAINTING
A.
If specified or shown, the field painting of all valves shall be in accordance with the
painting specified for the pipeline into which the valve is installed.
*****
09/25/15
Miscellaneous Valves and Traps
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
ITEM
46
H
15
G
NAME
1-2
VALVE BODY
2-0
GATE
3-2
4
MAT'L
2
1
DESCRIPTION
*
QTY.
36" FIG F93-W44, 50 PSI, V-PORT
1
T-304
MACHINED W/T-304 BOLTING
1
PACKING GLAND
T-304
FABRICATED W/T-304 BOLTING
1
4-0
PACKING SET
TLSP
RATED TO 500 DEG, 3-11 PH
1
6-3
WEAR STRIP
7-0
STEM ASSEMBLY
T-304
FABRICATED
1
10-2 YOKE ASSEMBLY
A-36
FABRICATED W/PLTD BOLTING
1
4:1 BEVEL GEAR W/STEM COVER AND HW
1
UHMWPE MACHINED
13-0 OPERATOR
(13-1/2)
3
1
* = A-36 EXTERIOR W/T-304 WETTED PARTS
F
H
G
F
13-0
19-5/8
(125-5/8)
E
E
10-2
D
NOTES:
1) FLANGES DRILLED AND TAPPED TO ASME B16.5, CLASS 150
2) 46" FLANGE OD WITH 1-1/2"-6UNC D&T HOLES 32 PLACES
ON A 42-3/4" B.C. EQUALLY SPACED AND STRADDLE CL
3) SEAT TEST: (METAL SEATED) LEAKAGE RATE PER MSS SP-81
40cc/INCH/MIN = 1440cc/MIN
4) HYDROSTATIC TEST: 75 PSI FOR 1 MINUTE (1-1/2x WORKING PRESSURE)
5) FUNCTIONAL TEST: OPEN AND CLOSE VALVE TWO FULL STROKES
6) APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 2400 LBS
34-5/8
STROKE
43-7/8
YOKE
3-2
85-3/8
7-1/2
D
7-0
6-3
C
V-PORTS
4-0
SHEET 1 OF 1
C
36-1/2
36-1/8
PORT I.D.
B
1/8 R.F.
33-1/2
SEAT I.D.
4-5/8±1/8 F-F
40-1/4
R.F. O.D.
(SEE NOTES)
12
11
BY DATE
SCALE: 1:24
S.O.#: QUOTE
DRAWING:
DRN: JRD CHK: DLG
DATE: 07/30/15
REV.:
15-0202-CD
9
8
7
B
50 PSI CWP, V-PORT
1-2
10
REVISION
THIS DRAWING AND THE DESCRIBED HEREON IS THE SOLE PROPERTY OF
LINED VALVE CO. INC., AND IS SUBJECT TO RETURN ON DEMAND. THIS
DRAWING IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISTRIBUTED, OR USED FOR MANUFACTURED WITHOUT THE EXPRESSED PERMISSION OF LINED VALVE CO. INC.
TITLE: 36" FIG F93-W44-BG4,
2-0
A
NO
6
5
4
3
2
0
1
A
Page Intentionally Left Blank
15140-1
2992/60270
SECTION 15140
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
This Section includes pipe hangers and supports, including all metallic hanging and
supporting devices and all concrete piers for above-ground or interior pipeline
conduits and fittings, except electrical conduits, as shown on the Contract Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicable Codes
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.3
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.
(MSS)
Hangers and supports shall conform to the latest requirements of the ASME Code for
Pressure Piping B31.1.0, and the MSS Standard Practice SP-58, SP-69, and SP-90
except as supplemented or modified by the requirements of this specification.
Hangers and supports shall be adequate to maintain the supported load in proper
position under all operating conditions. Supports and anchors shall be adequate to
support the pipe filled with water with a minimum safety factor of 5 and for the test
pressure specified. Hangers and supports shall be suitable for installation in wet wells,
in constant contact with raw water from river/reservoir.
SUBMITTALS
A.
09/02/15
In addition to those submittals identified in the Contract Documents, the following
items shall also be submitted:
1.
Contractor's Drawings
a.
Detailed shop drawings of each size and type of pipe hanger and support
demonstrating detailed compliance with all provisions specified herein,
including a complete materials of construction listing for each size and
type of hanger and support.
2.
The manufacturer shall provide (for informational purposes only) to the Engineer
and Contractor, at least 90 days prior to the scheduled arrival date of the initial
equipment, complete instructions for unloading, handling, protection, and storage
of the equipment.
Pipe Hangers and Support
15140-2
2992/60270
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Generally, unpainted machined parts shall be protected from damage by the elements
with the application of a strippable protective coating.
B.
Unloading of equipment will be performed by the Contractor. Unload, handle,
protect, and store the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
C.
Material and equipment damaged by handling or storage shall be repaired or replaced,
at no extra cost to the Owner, by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer.
PART 2 - MATERIAL
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Pipe Hangers and Supports
1.
Anvil International, Inc. (formerly Grinnell)
2.
B-Line
3.
Equal
B.
2.2
Unless stated otherwise, the catalog figure numbers in this Section refer to products of
Anvil International, Inc. Equivalent products by other acceptable manufacturers will
be reviewed by the Engineer.
DETAILED MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Pipe
1.
B.
Plate and Castings
1.
C.
Structural steel, wrought metals, and metal castings used for hangers and
supports shall meet the requirements of all applicable sections of the Contract
Documents.
Construction
1.
09/02/15
Piping used for supports shall be in accordance with the following standards:
a.
Wrought Steel Pipe - ASTM Des: A 53, Schedule 40
b.
Cast Iron Pipe - ASA Des: 21.6 and 21.8, Thickness Class 22
Hangers
a.
Overhead hangers for pipes eight inches in diameter and smaller shall be
supported by threaded rods and shall be equal to Figure 108, Split Ring
Type.
Pipe Hangers and Support
15140-3
2992/60270
b.
c.
d.
2.
D.
Overhead hangers for pipes 10 inches in diameter and larger, and for
smaller pipes where shown or specified, shall be single rolls and sockets
equal to Figure 171.
Ceiling flanges shall be utilized for pipes 8 inches or less and shall be
equal to Figure 153. Concrete rod attachment plates shall be utilized for
pipes larger than 8 inches and shall be equal to Figure 52.
Clevis Hanger: Adjustable clevis, wrought carbon steel, Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) listed, Factory Mutual (FM) approved, Grinnell figure
260.
Supports
A.
Brackets for supporting piping from walls or columns shall be furnished
with back plates where required to prevent the safe bearing capacity of
the wall from being exceeded and shall be equal to Figures 194, 195 and
199.
b.
Riser or offset pipe clamps shall be provided for small diameter piping
4” and smaller for horizontal or vertical runs along walls, beams, or
columns and shall be galvanized steel equal to Figure 103 or 261. When
supporting PVC pipe, neoprene rubber 1/8” thick shall be inserted
between pipe and clamp.
c.
Saddle stands shall be of the adjustable type equal to Figure 264, with
floor flanges for bolting to floors or foundations. Stanchions shall be
equal to Figure 259.
d.
Where piping is installed on structural steel supports, blocking or pipe
rolls shall be provided to prevent lateral pipe movement. For piping up
to 24", pipe rolls for welded brackets shall be equal to Figure 175.
Where required or specified pipe rolls shall be equal to Figure 271.
e.
Insulated pipes 2-1/2 inches in diameter and larger shall be provided with
protection saddles, Figures 160 thru 165, 165A, and 166A as required or
specified.
f.
Beam and channel clamps shall be of malleable iron and shall be equal to
Figure 133. Side I-beam clamps shall be equal to Figure 225 and side
channel clamps shall be equal to Figure 226.
g.
Channel sections shall be complete with clamping nuts and fittings.
Channel sections systems for piping supports systems shall be Series PS200 Power Strut or equal. Finish for channel sections and fittings shall
be hot dipped galvanized conforming to ASTM A-153. All exposed
channel ends shall be provided with end caps.
h.
Concrete pier supports shall be of Class "B" concrete. 60 durometer
rubber shall be placed between concrete and pipe.
Dissimilar Metals
1.
Where dissimilar metals are in contact with one another, proper dielectric
insulation shall be provided.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
09/02/15
Installation
Pipe Hangers and Support
15140-4
2992/60270
1.
Installation shall be performed as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be
such that the centerline elevations of supported piping are maintained in an
orderly manner.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Documents, hangers and supports for
all pipe other than PVC shall be spaced not more than 10 feet apart and at or near
changes in direction of pipelines.
3.
PVC pipe supports shall be in accordance with the following and at or near
changes in direction of pipelines.
Non-continuously Supported Pipe
Pipe Size*
(Inches)
½" PVC
1" PVC
2" PVC
3" PVC
4" PVC
6" PVC
8" PVC
Maximum Hanger or Clamp
Spacing (feet)
4.25
5.0
6.5
7.75
8.5
10.25
11.25
* Fractional piping diameters shall conform to the next smallest support spacing.
4.
For copper pipe and copper tubing carrying liquid with specific gravity of 1.0 or
less:
Pipe Size
1/2 inch
3/4 inch
1 inch
1-1/2 inch
2 inch
2-1/2 inch
3 inch
5.
For steel pipe carrying water or liquid with specific gravity less than or equal to
1.0, at pressures from 0 to 125 psig and temperatures from 0 to 250 deg F:
Pipe Size
1/2 inch
3/4 inch
1 inch
1-1/2 inch
2 inch
Pipe Size
2-1/2 inch
3 inch
09/02/15
Spacing
5 feet
5 feet
6 feet
8 feet
8 feet
9 feet
10 feet
Spacing
7 feet
7 feet
7 feet
9 feet
10 feet
Spacing
11 feet
12 feet
Pipe Hangers and Support
15140-5
2992/60270
4 inch
6 inch
8 inch
10 inch
12 inch
16 inch
20 inch
B.
14 feet
17 feet
19 feet
20 feet
23 feet
27 feet
30 feet
Field Painting
Field painting shall be as specified in Section 09900.
*****
09/02/15
Pipe Hangers and Support
Page Intentionally Left Blank
16010-1
2992/60270
SECTION 16010
ELECTRICAL - GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
Provide complete, tested and fully functional electrical systems as shown on the Drawings
and as specified herein.
B.
Electrical equipment and installed systems shall be suitable for the application, shall safe
for the intended use, shall be fully rated for the available fault current, and shall conform
to local building codes and statutory requirements.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.
B.
Electrical requirements specified in this Section apply to electrical equipment and materials
described in other Sections of Divisions “General”, “Equipment”, “Electrical” and
“Control Systems Integration”
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
This section includes the requirements for providing modifications to the existing
Distribution Well electrical system. This work includes the provision of a 3-phase feeder
to two (2) new slide gate electric actuators. This work also includes the supply of conduits
and conductors for various controls signals and wireless communications.
B.
The work includes, but is not limited to, the work described in other Sections of Divisions
“General”, “Equipment”, “Electrical” and “Control Systems Integration” and the
following:
1.
Removal and/or relocation of existing equipment
2.
Temporary lighting and power as required for construction and as hereinafter
specified
3.
Field wiring for equipment provided under other Sections of the Specification
4.
Thorough cleaning of all equipment prior to energization
5.
Acceptance testing of all equipment installed under this Division
6.
Protection of all equipment under this Division until the final acceptance of the job
C.
Coordinate Divisions “General”, “Equipment”, “Electrical” and “Control Systems
Integration” requirements with work described in other Divisions of the Specification.
D.
Submit pre-construction submittals, shop drawings, product data, samples, design data, test
reports, certificates, manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's field reports, operation and
maintenance data, closeout submittals and other specified documents to the Engineer for
review and approval as described in the General Provisions, Special Provisions, this
Section, and in other Sections of Divisions “General”, “Equipment”, “Electrical” and
“Control Systems Integration”
09/02/15
Electrical - General
16010-2
2992/60270
1.4
1.5
E.
Perform electrical acceptance tests described in Part 3 of other Divisions “General”,
“Equipment”, “Electrical” and “Control Systems Integration” Sections.
F.
The following principal items of work will be performed under other Sections unless
otherwise noted:
1.
Finish painting of exposed raceways, boxes, fittings, hangers, and supports as
described in Division “Finishes”.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Ambient temperature, humidity, and elevation ranges:
1.
Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40 deg C.
2.
Humidity: Less than 90 percent (non-condensing).
3.
Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet (1000 m).
B.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings show allowable space to scale for
anticipated equipment sizes. Comply with NEC requirements for working clearances and
with manufacturer's recommendations for access for maintenance. Notify the Engineer if
insufficient space is available for available products.
DEFINITIONS
A.
09/02/15
In addition to the Definitions in the General Provisions, the following definitions apply to
Divisions “General”, “Equipment”, “Electrical” and “Control Systems Integration”
1.
Acceptance Tests: power distribution and control equipment testing performed in
conformance with NETA Acceptance Testing Specification
2.
AHJ: The statutory Authority Having Jurisdiction as defined in NEC Article 100
for enforcement of legally required compliance to local codes, standards, and
ordinances.
3.
ANSI: American National Standards Institute
4.
AWG: American Wire Gauge
5.
CFR: Code of Federal Regulations
6.
Cable: an assembly of insulated conductors
7.
Control panel: an electrical enclosure housing control logic devices and an operator
control interface
8.
Commissioning: the process of testing system performance after the sequential
steps of installation, testing, energization, startup (including initial adjustment and
de-bugging) and functional testing of individual pieces of equipment have all been
completed
9.
Contract: as used in the Electrical Specification, includes all Contract documents
including Specifications and Appendices, Drawings, Addenda, and Change Orders
10.
ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association
11.
Equipment: a general term including materials, fittings, devices, appliances,
fixtures, apparatus, and the like, used as part of, or in connection with, an electrical
installation (OSHA Section 29 CFR 1910.399(46) definition)
12.
Field wiring: on-site installation of raceways & conductors to connect equipment
in accordance with approved drawings
13.
Field test: electrical test carried out on-site
Electrical - General
16010-3
2992/60270
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
09/02/15
Fail-safe: selection of control devices and contacts in a manner which results in
safe shutdown of the equipment whenever one of the following events occurs:
a.
Power supply failure
b.
Loss of remote control RUN command (normal configuration: contacts
close to run equipment)
c.
Intentional and unintentional disconnection of device (normal
configuration: contacts open to shut down equipment)
d.
High contact resistance or high resistance connection
e.
Loss of 4-20mADC signal
f.
Definite-time sequence takes too long, e.g., reduced voltage motor starter
fails to make transition from START mode to RUN mode after a
reasonable time
g.
Defined sequence does not occur, e.g., there is no flow from a motor driven
pump within a reasonable time after the motor starter contactor is
energized.
Furnish and install: same as "Provide" below.
Functional testing: verification of the satisfactory performance of control logic,
with due attention to the functionality of equipment protective devices, for
example, overload relays, temperature switches, pressure switches, flow switches,
and similar devices, under actual operating conditions
IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
ISO: International Standards Organization
Lineup: with respect to switchgear, switchboards, and motor control centers, a
contiguous group of vertical sections with common main busbars, and including
bus tie breaker sections and control sections
LV: low voltage, operating voltage under 600V (NEC definition)
Megger: insulation tester with megohm scale
NEC: NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code
NETA: InterNational Electrical Testing Association, Inc.
NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies
NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
NRTL: Nationally recognized testing laboratory as defined in 29 CFR 1910.7 as it
applies to testing and inspecting for safety in the workplace (OSHA definition)
Nonconformity: The nonfulfillment of a specified requirement (ASQ definition)
"Or approved equal": proposed "equal" product shall be in conformance with all
specified requirements, shall be equivalent in materials of construction to specified
manufacturers' products, shall have equal or superior performance in the
conditions anticipated for use of the product in this project, and shall be approved
by the Engineer
OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Act
Panel: with respect to circuit breaker and fuse power distribution centers, panel is
equivalent to "distribution board", e.g., lighting panel; with respect to control
panels, refers either to the entire control panel itself or to a steel plate used for
mounting devices inside the control panel
Provide: Throughout the Specification, use of this term includes project
administration, quality assurance, human resources, tools & equipment, logistics
and scheduling, submittals of shop drawings & samples for approval, managing
suppliers, purchasing, manufacturing, factory testing, release for shipment,
packing, delivery, storage, submittal of coordinated & dimensioned installation
drawings for approval, installation, surface preparation & finishes, site testing,
Electrical - General
16010-4
2992/60270
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
1.6
REFERENCE STANDARDS IN EFFECT
A.
1.7
startup & commissioning, on-site supervision by equipment manufacturers'
representatives, spare parts & tools, Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals,
training, guarantees and warrantees, other work described in individual Sections
of the Specification, and the Contractor's duties, responsibilities, risks, and
liabilities under the Contract.
Punch list: document containing detailed descriptions of non-conformities
Quality: conformance to specified requirements.
RMS: root mean square
Raceways: cable ladder and tray, conduit, duct, wireway, and associated boxes and
fittings which enclose, support, and protect wires and cables
Shop drawings: a complete package of manufacturer's equipment drawings, bill of
materials, catalog data sheets, performance curves, calculations, and other data
provided to demonstrate conformance to the equipment specification
Substitution: an alternative, nonconforming product proposed by the Contractor in
lieu of a specified, conforming product
Substantial Completion: an electrical system may be considered substantially
complete when the equipment has passed the specified tests required prior to
energization, has been energized, has passed the Electrical Acceptance Tests, and
all related Specification requirements have been met except for well-defined minor
items which, in the opinion of the Engineer, may be repaired or replaced prior to
Final Acceptance without adversely affecting process performance.
Terminal box: an electrical enclosure containing labeled terminal blocks for
connection of wiring
UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
VFC: variable frequency controller
VFD: variable frequency drive, the combination of VFC and inverter-duty motor
that drive mechanical loads using the principle of variable frequency motor control
Wiring: conductors and connections to equipment terminals. 'Wiring' and 'cabling'
shall be considered equivalent terms. Fiber optic cables shall be included in the
scope of electrical wiring.
Notwithstanding revision dates shown in this and other Sections of Divisions “General”,
“Equipment”, “Electrical” and “Control Systems Integration” the codes and standards
applicable to this project shall be those in effect when bids are submitted.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
In consultation with the equipment and materials Suppliers, the Contractor shall prepare
and submit a Compliance Statement as described in "SUBMITTALS" with each submittal
requiring approval.
B.
The Engineer's review of a submittal shall not relieve the Contractor of any Contractor
responsibilities under the Contract. Review of a submittal that is incomplete, or one that
has nonconformities that are not described in the Compliance Statement, followed by the
discovery of unapproved nonconformities, will result in replacement of the nonconforming items at no additional cost to the Owner. Substitutions require the approval of
the Engineer as described in the General Provisions.
09/02/15
Electrical - General
16010-5
2992/60270
1.8
1.9
C.
Manufacturers of electrical equipment shall have quality certification to ISO 9000:2000 or
an equivalent Quality Management System acceptable to the Engineer.
D.
Equipment, materials, and installation shall conform to NEC requirements and shall be
NRTL-listed and labeled.
E.
On-site electrical acceptance testing shall be performed as specified in Part 3 of other
Sections of the Specification.
F.
Manufacturers, manufacturer's representatives, subcontractors, supervisors, installers, and
testing agencies shall have qualifications and experience as described in other Sections of
the Specification. Qualifications and experience submittals for firms and individuals shall
be submitted, re-submitted, or updated whenever requested by the Owner's Representative.
SAFETY IN THE WORKPLACE
A.
Electrical equipment and materials, and the Contractor's installation practices, shall
conform to the following:
1.
Current edition of OSHA sections of the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): Part
29 CFR 1910 for General Industry and Part 19 CFR 1926 for Construction
Activities
2.
NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code
3.
Current edition of NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for
Employee Workplaces
B.
These regulations and standards impose obligations on equipment manufacturers to obtain
NRTL certification, listing, and labeling to comply with OSHA (Occupational Safety and
Health Act) and Department of Labor regulations.
C.
All electrical equipment for which NRTL test procedures have been established shall be
certified, listed, and labeled, or otherwise determined to be safe for its intended use, by a
NRTL. The absence of a specific reference to NRTL-listing in other Sections shall not
relieve the Contractor of the requirement to provide NRTL-listed equipment, and to obtain
certification as required by the AHJ in cases where NRTL listing and labeling is not a
manufacturer's standard offering for a particular product.
D.
Equipment shall not be modified in any manner adversely affecting safety for the intended
use, nor shall any equipment be modified on-site without the approval of the manufacturer.
E.
Equipment sound levels shall not exceed limits established by reference standards and local
regulations. In the absence of reference standards and local regulatory requirements, sound
pressure levels shall not exceed 85 dB (A) measured three feet from the equipment.
F.
Equipment with moving parts shall be fully guarded in compliance with OSHA rules and
regulations.
INSPECTIONS BY THE AHJ
A.
09/02/15
The Contractor shall make arrangements for electrical inspection of the project by the AHJ.
Upon completion of the work, final certificate of approval documents shall be submitted
Electrical - General
16010-6
2992/60270
to the Engineer for forwarding to the Owner. This certificate shall be submitted prior to
request for final payment. The Contractor shall pay all fees required for inspection.
1.10
1.11
1.12
WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS
A.
Materials and equipment shall be new and undamaged, shall be marked by the
manufacturer, and shall be delivered to the construction site in the original factory
packaging.
B.
Materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the Drawings, the
Specification, the manufacturer's installation, operation, and maintenance instructions, and
NECA installation standards that have been adopted by ANSI. In the event of apparent
conflicts or discrepancies, the Engineer shall be informed of the apparent conflict or
discrepancy in writing, and will instruct the Contractor how to proceed.
RESOURCES AND CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient resources, including qualified and experienced
project managers, electrical engineers, superintendents, technicians, supervisors,
electricians, tools and construction equipment to complete the electrical work in
accordance with the activity durations and sequences shown on the Construction Schedule
for this project.
B.
The construction schedule shall include the following activities and milestones, in realistic
sequence, for each major item of electrical equipment in each building:
1.
Review of shop drawings
2.
Approval of shop drawings (milestone)
3.
Shipping
4.
Delivery to site (milestone)
5.
Equipment, wire & Cable installation
6.
Tests on completion of installation (prior to energization)
7.
Energization (milestone)
8.
Acceptance testing
9.
Functional testing
10.
Installation, acceptance testing, and functional testing and commissioning
complete (milestone)
CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A.
1.13
The Electrical Drawings show scaled layouts of “basis of design” equipment but do not
include "approved for construction" dimensions for equipment, which shall be based on
approved equipment shop drawings.
COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL WORK WITH OTHER TRADES
A.
09/02/15
Work under this Division shall be performed in conjunction with the work of other trades.
Coordinate electrical installation work with the overall construction schedule. Examine the
plans and specifications prior to commencement of work and become familiar with all
phases of work involved prior to commencing installation work.
Electrical - General
16010-7
2992/60270
B.
1.14
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A.
1.15
1.16
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating dimensions of equipment and working
clearances in accordance with the NEC, and in all cases shall bring to the attention of the
Engineer any discrepancies on the plans and in the specifications prior to installation. Any
work that installed without conformance to NEC requirements shall be removed and
reinstalled at the Contractor's expense. The layout for sleeves, chases, openings, etc., must
be arranged prior to construction in order to prevent unnecessary cutting. Examine
Architectural drawings for doors swings, countertop heights, built-in furniture and
casework, and other factors affecting electrical outlet locations prior to roughing-in
raceways, boxes, fittings, and outlets.
Following approval of equipment shop drawings, the Contractor shall create dimensioned
electrical equipment layout drawings for electrical and telecommunications rooms and
areas, showing the relationships of approved electrical equipment with the building
structural and architectural components, walls, floors, ceilings, doors, windows, louvers,
access hatches, concrete equipment pads, anchors and bracing. One set of these
Coordination Drawings shall be maintained at the construction site throughout the
construction phase.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
All equipment and materials shall be manufactured, tested, and installed in accordance with
the National Electrical Code (NEC) and local codes and standards, in accordance with the
requirements of the AHJ.
B.
In addition, work shall be in accordance with the versions of the following referenced
standards in effect at the time of bid opening:
1.
American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA) (establishes NRTL
accreditation)
2.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
3.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
4.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
5.
Code of Federal Regulations (29 CFR 1903, 1910, and 1926)
6.
Factory Mutual Engineering & Research (FME&R)
7.
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)
8.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
9.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
10.
International Building Code
11.
International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
12.
National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)
13.
National Electrical Manufacturers Associates (NEMA)
14.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
15.
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
16.
Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL) and other NRTL standards and test procedures
SUBMITTALS
A.
09/02/15
In addition to conforming to the requirements described in the General Provisions,
submittals shall conform to the following requirements.
Electrical - General
16010-8
2992/60270
B.
One complete shop drawing submittal is required for all of the electrical equipment
described in single Divisions “General”, “Equipment”, “Electrical” and “Control Systems
Integration” Sections of the Specification. Prerequisites for equipment shop drawing
submittals, for example, Harmonics Analysis submittals associated with Variable
Frequency Controllers and Coordination Studies associated with Switchgear, are described
in each Section. Incomplete shop drawing submittals, and out-of-sequence shop drawing
submittals, will be reviewed to the extent needed to determine incompleteness and out-ofsequence, and returned to the Contractor for re-submission.
C.
Compliance Statement: with each Shop Drawing submittal, include a Compliance
Statement listing each Specification Section, and Part 1, 2, and 3 Sub-Sections, stating,
paragraph-by-paragraph, compliance with the Specification, each minor nonconformity
that is within the intent of the Specification, and proposed nonconformities. Provide short
description of minor nonconformities, and detailed explanation of other nonconformities.
D.
Submittal Format
1.
Each submittal shall be accompanied by a transmittal letter showing the submittal
category and Specification Section reference number(s). Submittals shall be 3-hole
punched and neatly bound in a 3-pin or 3-ring binder. Stapled bindings are not
acceptable.
2.
Submittals shall have a complete Table of Contents with tabs corresponding to the
Table of Contents headings.
3.
Submittal transmittal letters shall clearly identify the reason for submittal, e.g., for
approval, as manufactured, or as-built / record.
4.
Each page of each submittal shall be numbered. Page numbers shall be listed on
the Table of Contents. Content shall be printed on 8-1/2 x 11 inch paper, or 11 x
17 paper (folded). Larger size drawings shall be folded and placed in labeled
individual clear plastic pockets.
5.
Product Data shall be clearly marked to show which items are proposed for this
project. Information that does not apply to this project shall be crossed out.
E.
Submittal Categories
1.
Preconstruction Submittals, including proposed substitutions, supplier and
manufacturer qualifications and experience, construction scheduling
2.
Shop Drawings, including equipment drawings with a complete bill of materials
and supporting manufacturer's catalog data. One separate and complete shop
drawing submittal for all of the equipment specified in each Section is required.
3.
Product Data, marked to indicate precisely which items are proposed for this
project. One complete and separate Product Data submittal for all of the equipment
and materials described in each Section requiring a product data submittal, is
required. See Submittals requirements in other Sections in Divisions “General”,
“Equipment”, “Electrical” and “Control Systems Integration” to determine if
Product Data is to be included in Shop Drawing submittals.
4.
Samples, labeled by name, Specification Section and sub-clause, and mounted on
sample boards
5.
Design Data, including manufacturer's design calculations, where specified
6.
Test Reports, including prototype tests, factory tests, field tests, acceptance tests,
and functional tests. A test report is required for each specified test.
09/02/15
Electrical - General
16010-9
2992/60270
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Certificates, including seismic qualification certification, welding certificates,
factory training certificates for manufacturer's representatives
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions, including unloading, hoisting, rigging,
short term storage, long term storage, method of field assembly, and other
installation instructions
Manufacturer's Field Reports, including inspections and training records
Operation and Maintenance Manuals, including manufacturer's standard published
literature and specially prepared descriptions of operation
Closeout Submittals, including black line paper copy of Record Drawings marked
in red illustrating changes during construction
Spare Parts and Special Tools List
F.
In the absence of contradictory instructions in the General Provisions, Shop Drawings shall
be marked with revision blocks to indicate status as follows:
1.
FOR APPROVAL
2.
AS MANUFACTURED (incorporates Engineer's comments)
3.
AS BUILT / RECORD (incorporates on-site modifications)
G.
Record Drawings: Maintain a full size paper set of "black-line" working drawings
throughout the project, and carefully record in red ink the locations and sizes of each major
piece of electrical equipment, as well as junction boxes, fused disconnects, and conduit
routing, to scale. Upon Substantial Completion of the work, deliver the marked-up set of
prints to the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to withhold final payment until "AsBuilt" drawings are received.
H.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Provide copies of electrical Operation and
Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the General Provisions. O&M Manuals shall
be organized according to Divisions “Equipment”, “Electrical” and “Control Systems
Integration” Section numbers. Each copy shall be bound in a durable, 3-ring hardback
binder, with data sheets individually punched and reinforced to prevent tearout. Data
sheets shall be grouped, and binder dividers shall be provided to match the Table of
Contents. Each Manual shall have an identifying label on the spine and front cover and
shall include the following:
1.
List of all O&M Manuals in the front of each manual.
2.
Table of Contents for each manual and each binder
3.
Copy of each of the following:
a.
Preconstruction Submittals
b.
Shop Drawings
c.
Product Data
d.
Design Data
e.
Test Reports
f.
Certificates
g.
Manufacturer's Instructions
h.
Manufacturer's Field Reports
i.
Operation and Maintenance Data
j.
Closeout Submittals
k.
Spare Parts and Special Tools
l.
Updated Panelboard directories (as-built)
09/02/15
Electrical - General
16010-10
2992/60270
I.
1.17
OUTAGES
A.
1.18
Spare Parts and Special Tools List: 90 days prior to the scheduled Substantial Completion
date, submit a complete list of manufacturer's recommended Spare Parts and Special Tools
for equipment to the Owner, with prices firm for 90 days and estimated delivery dates.
Electrical outages: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary electrical service if required by the Specification.
1.
Submit written requests to the Owner for approval of proposed electrical outages
a minimum of 30 days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical circuits,
with step-by-step sequence and schedule for proposed outage. If required to
maintain critical processes in operation during an outage, submit proposed method
of providing temporary electrical circuits and power supplies.
2.
Confirm approved interruption of electrical service one week in advance of Ownerapproved date.
3.
Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without written approval
from the Owner.
TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER
A.
Refer to the General Provisions.
B.
The Contractor shall provide all temporary electric services for power and lighting
including panels, feeders, lighting, outlets, branch circuits, etc.
C.
The Owner's electrical power shall not be used without permission of the Owner.
D.
All temporary work shall be in accordance with the NEC, OSHA, and NFPA safety
requirements and shall be completely removed upon completion of the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A.
2.2
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A.
2.3
Provide equipment and materials in compliance with other Sections of Divisions
“General”, “Equipment”, “Electrical” and “Control Systems Integration” The requirements
in this Section apply to all Sections in Divisions “General”, “Equipment”, “Electrical” and
“Control Systems Integration”
Electrical equipment, raceways, boxes, fittings, wires and cables shall be marked in the
field in accordance with Division “Electrical” Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems".
ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES
A.
09/02/15
In the absence of other specified NEMA enclosure ratings in other Sections of the
Specification, and where cross-referenced in other Sections of Divisions “Electrical”,
Electrical - General
16010-11
2992/60270
“Communications”, “Electronic Safety and Security” and “Utilities” electrical enclosures
shall have degree of protection ratings suitable for the intended application (e.g.,
watertight, dust-tight, explosion-proof) and environmental conditions.
2.4
B.
Electrical equipment enclosures shall have the following NEMA 250 ratings for the
following specified non-hazardous locations unless otherwise indicated:
1.
NEMA 1 or 1A painted steel:
a. Electrical Rooms
b. Clean, dry, indoor rooms in administrative office building areas
2.
NEMA 4X stainless steel:
a. Outdoors
b. Kitchens and food preparation areas
c. Indoor process equipment and pump rooms
d. Indoor chemical rooms
e. Laboratory rooms
f. Basements and below-grade rooms
3.
NEMA 12: Clean, dry non-process areas, attics, and HVAC equipment rooms
C.
Enclosures located in hazardous areas shall be epoxy powder-coated cast aluminum NEMA
7 and/or 9 with listing required for the hazardous area classification unless otherwise
indicated.
D.
Where different enclosure ratings and enclosure materials are specified in other Sections
of the Specification, the Contractor shall submit a written request for clarification of the
intent of the Specification to the Engineer.
E.
For motor enclosure requirements, refer to Division “Electrical” Section "Common Motor
Requirements".
ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE
A.
2.5
DISSIMILAR METALS
A.
2.6
Power conversion equipment, including variable frequency controllers, battery-powered
inverters, computer power supplies, frequency converters, and Uninterruptible Power
Supplies, shall be fitted with EMI (electromagnetic interference), RFI (radio frequency
interference) and telephone interference filters to limit interference effects on other
equipment in the area in accordance with IEEE standards and recommendations applicable
to the equipment.
Dissimilar metals shall not be connected, spliced, or joined except where specifically
approved in writing by the Engineer. Copper busbars, aluminum busbars, and copper-toaluminum busbar connections shall be tin-plated at joints and at cable lugs. Bolted
electrical conductor connections shall be made with [silicone-bronze] [grade 3 or better
plated steel] bolts, nuts, and washers. Belleville washers & tin-plated flat washers shall be
used at aluminum-to-copper and aluminum-to-aluminum busbar joints.
WARRANTIES
A.
09/02/15
Warranties for equipment and materials shall conform to the General Provisions.
Electrical - General
16010-12
2992/60270
B.
Provide an on-site parts and labor warranty for a minimum period of one year after
Substantial Completion for all equipment and materials. In cases where the manufacturer
offers a longer warranty period, the longer warranty period shall apply as described by the
manufacturer.
C.
All components of electrical systems that are not fully functional at the time of Substantial
Completion shall have warranties extended to provide minimum one year coverage of fully
operational equipment unless otherwise approved by the Owner's Representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DELIVERY AND HANDLING
A.
3.2
3.3
STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT
A.
All electrical equipment to be used in construction shall be properly stored and protected
against the elements. General construction materials shall be stored in covered trailers.
Switchgear, unit substations, motor controllers, panelboards, emergency lighting, solid
state equipment, engine generator shall be stored in a clean, dry, indoor location, under
cover, until the building is weathertight and the area where the equipment is to be installed
has been completed to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative, including completion
of overhead work by other trades.
B.
Long term storage instructions of the manufacturer shall be followed.
C.
Equipment with anti-condensation heaters shall have the 120VAC anti-condensation
heaters energized from temporary 120VAC supplies as soon the factory packaging has
been opened.
D.
Equipment enclosures exposed to construction damage such as paint spots, spackling,
waterproofing, insulation etc. shall be covered and protected against damage.
INSPECTIONS PRIOR TO COVERING-UP
A.
3.4
Equipment delivered to site shall be handled in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations by experienced riggers, crane operators, and fork lift truck operators.
Raceways embedded in concrete or otherwise concealed shall be inspected in the presence
of the Owner's Representative prior to placement of concrete. Sufficient time shall be
allowed to make corrections if required.
ON-SITE INSPECTIONS AND NONCONFORMITIES
A.
Equipment shall be inspected on delivery to site for physical damage and for compliance
with the Specification and approved equipment shop drawings.
B.
Installed equipment, raceways, and wiring shall be inspected on completion of installation
for compliance with the Specification and approved installation drawings.
09/02/15
Electrical - General
16010-13
2992/60270
3.5
3.6
C.
A Punch List will be prepared by the Owner's Representative during inspections and
testing, and issued to the Contractor for corrective action.
D.
Repairs, replacement, and other corrective action that requires de-energizing any part of
the Electrical Power Distribution and Control System shall be completed prior to the
scheduled date for Substantial Completion of the project.
PENETRATIONS AND SEALING
A.
Sleeves and rectangular openings shall be provided for raceways provided under this
Contract, and for raceways for future equipment where future equipment is shown on the
Drawings. Sleeves and rectangular openings for the passage of raceways and conductors
shall be sealed after the raceways and conductors have been installed. Spare sleeves and
rectangular openings shall also be sealed.
B.
Penetration of Waterproof Construction: Coordinate the work to minimize penetration of
waterproof construction, including roofs and exterior walls. Where penetrations are
necessary, provide sleeves and sealing fittings to make each penetration watertight.
Conduit sleeves and openings shall be sealed watertight with mechanical seals.
Watertightness shall not rely on caulking.
C.
Penetration of Fire-Rated Construction: Sleeves and openings in fire-resistant walls and
floors for electrical raceways, wires, and cables shall be sealed after installation of the
raceways, wires, and cables with NRTL-certified fire penetration seals, sealant, and firerated foam filler products to the same degree of fire resistance (e.g., 1, 2, or 4 hours) as the
adjacent walls and floors, and to the satisfaction of the AHJ. Where both fire sealing and
water sealing is required, mechanical seals with NRTL-listed fire-resistant properties shall
be used. Fire sealants shall be compatible with the cable jacket and wire insulation
materials. Manufacturer's certification of compatibility shall be provided at the request of
the Engineer. For additional requirements, refer to Division “Electrical” Section
"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems".
ALTERATIONS AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING WORK
A.
Conform to the General Provisions.
B.
Where the work specified under this Division connects to the existing electrical systems,
the Contractor shall perform all necessary alterations to the existing work as required.
C.
All work performed on the existing electrical systems shall be in accordance with the
applicable provisions of the Specification. Visit the project site prior to submitting bids and
examine the conditions in which work will be performed. Carefully document all existing
conditions pertaining to removal and demolition work.
D.
Contractor shall make connections to existing equipment where indicated on the Drawings.
E.
All existing electrical materials not reused under this Division, and not indicated for
handover to the Owner, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be
expeditiously removed from the project site.
09/02/15
Electrical - General
16010-14
2992/60270
3.7
3.8
F.
While performing connections and alterations to existing electrical work, the Contractor
shall take special care to protect all existing equipment from dirt, debris and damage.
Damaged equipment shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
G.
All removal work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall be
executed with the least possible disturbance to the building and tenants. The scheduling of
all removal work shall be coordinated with other trades and with the Owner's schedule and
operation of the building.
H.
Where removal work is performed, the Contractor shall repair all building surfaces
damaged by such work. Cut back embedded conduits to 2 inches minimum below finished
face of walls, floor, and ceilings, and fill in holes with appropriate patching material.
Repair, re-tile, replace (in the case of ceiling panels) or re-paint to match existing adjacent
surfaces.
ELECTRICAL SAFETY AND TEST EQUIPMENT
A.
Maintain the following test instruments and calibration certificates less than 12 months old
on-site as a minimum:
1.
True RMS digital volt-ohm meter with resistance scale
2.
Clip-on ammeter with range from 1 to <insert maximum amps> amps
3.
1000V DC battery-powered megger insulation tester
B.
Provide electrical safety equipment, including personal protective equipment, hot sticks,
HV gloves, electrical blankets, test instruments, lighting, ventilation, and instructions in
the use of safety equipment, and perform the work under this Contract in accordance with
applicable safety rules and regulations. The Contractor's attention is directed to safety
issues related to confined spaces as defined in OSHA regulations.
C.
One numbered safety lockout padlock with an 'unlawful-to-duplicate' unique key shall be
provided for each motor controller. Safety lockouts shall be used during testing and
commissioning, and shall subsequently be handed over to the Owner in a lockable sheet
metal key cabinet. The safety lockout padlock supplier shall be a specialist supplier with a
registered key program.
CLEANING AND PAINTING
A.
Conform to the General and Special Provisions.
B.
After installation and wiring work is completed, all dust and debris shall be removed from
the interior and exterior of each electrical equipment enclosure and motor by vacuumcleaning with circuits de-energized. Do not use compressed air for cleaning. Vacuum
cleaner wands and brushes shall be non-conducting. Anti-static protection shall be
provided for static-sensitive devices.
C.
Clean and remove all rust, scale, oil, grease, and dirt from panelboard enclosures, conduits,
pull, junction and terminal boxes, fittings and hangers, leaving surfaces in condition for
final surface preparation and painting under Division “Finishes”.
09/02/15
Electrical - General
16010-15
2992/60270
3.9
3.10
3.11
D.
All ferrous materials that are concealed, or exposed in unfinished areas, including fittings,
hangers, junction, pull and terminal boxes, that are not plated or painted with a factoryapplied finish, shall be painted under this Section with one coat of zinc-chromate primer
and one finish coat of paint approved by the Engineer. Nonferrous materials shall be
cleaned only and left unpainted.
E.
Equipment furnished with a factory finish coat shall have finish carefully touched-up where
it is scratched or otherwise damaged. Touch-up work shall be match the color and type of
the original finish.
INSPECTION AND TESTING ON-SITE
A.
The Contractor shall hire a NETA-certified or NICET-certified specialist electrical testing
firm to perform on-site inspection and electrical testing.
B.
Perform Electrical Acceptance Tests in accordance with NETA Acceptance Testing
Specifications as described in Part 3 of each Section of Division “Electrical”.
C.
Submit manufacturer-endorsed field test data sheets & procedures for approval, test
equipment and materials on-site prior to site visit by manufacturer's factory-trained
representative, test equipment on-site under the supervision of the Owner's Representative
and the equipment manufacturer's factory-trained representative(s), and submit
manufacturer's statement of acceptance of installation prior to energization of equipment.
Invite the Engineer and Owner's Representatives to witness field testing.
D.
Electrical equipment shall not be energized without the approval of the Engineer.
E.
A complete certified electrical test report shall be compiled by the electrical testing firm,
checked for completeness, and submitted for the record.
F.
The Contractor shall notify all parties whose presence is necessary for the test; and in all
cases, the Engineer shall be notified at least one week prior to the actual test.
ELECTRICAL POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TESTS
A.
Conform to the General Provisions.
B.
Additional testing shall be carried out where recommended by equipment suppliers or
requested by the Engineer.
LOAD BALANCING
A.
09/02/15
Single phase circuits in single and three-phase circuit breaker panelboards shall be
balanced initially based on the load calculations. Load currents shall be measured under
actual operating conditions, and under conditions described by the Engineer. Circuiting
shall be re-arranged as necessary to obtain current balancing within 10% on each busbar
under normal operating conditions.
Electrical - General
16010-16
2992/60270
3.12
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.
Conform to the General Provisions.
B.
Upon completion of all work furnished and installed under Divisions “Electrical” and
“Control Systems Integration”, instruct and train the Owner's representatives in the
operation and maintenance of all the various apparatus and equipment to the complete
satisfaction of the Engineer. Training shall be as specified in each Section of Divisions
“Electrical” and “Control Systems Integration” and shall start when the completed systems
have been put in operational condition and tested as specified. A complete Training Course
syllabus together with copies of the training materials shall be submitted with the
Contractor's proposed schedule for instruction and training.
C.
Provide classroom and on-site training of the Owner's staff by an authorized representative
of the equipment manufacturer during commissioning of the following electrical
equipment:
1.
Control panels and control consoles: 1 day each
2.
Telecommunications System: 1 day
D.
Submit qualifications and experience of manufacturer's proposed training personnel for
approval.
E.
Additional requirements for training are described in other Sections of the Specification.
END OF SECTION
09/02/15
Electrical - General
16060-1
2992/60270
SECTION 16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Provide equipment grounding conductors, and bonding in accordance with NEC
requirements, in conformance with this Section and as shown on the Drawings.
B.
This Section includes requirements for grounding electrical systems and equipment.
Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special
requirements of systems described in other Sections.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
1.5
Related Documents include the following Division “Electrical” Sections:
1.
“Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cable” for wire connector and
equipment grounding conductor requirements
2.
“Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems” for grounding bushing requirements
Refer to NEC for definitions of grounding terms used in this Section.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer’s Factory Qualifications: Manufacturing facilities shall have accreditation to
ISO 9000:2000 or an equivalent quality management system acceptable to the Engineer.
The manufacturing company shall be listed in a published NRTL directory of companies
offering NRTL-listed and labeled products.
B.
Testing Firm Qualifications: An independent firm, with experience and capability to
conduct specified tests, and is a member company of NETA or is an NRTL as defined by
OSHA in 19 CFR 1910.7, acceptable to the AHJ.
C.
Testing Firm’s Field Supervisor Qualifications: person currently certified by NETA or
NICET to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
09/02/15
Comply with the following standards:
1.
IEEE 80-1986 Interpretation: Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding
2.
IEEE 80-2000 Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding
3.
IEEE 81.2-1991 Guide for Measurement of Impedance and Safety Characteristics
of Large Extended or Interconnected Grounding Systems (Part 2)
4.
IEEE 81-1983 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistively, Ground Impedance, and
Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System (Part 1)
5.
IEEE 118-1978 (R1992) Standard Test Code for Resistance Measurements
Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems
16060-2
2992/60270
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
1.6
IEEE 142-1991 Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems (IEEE Green Book)
IEEE 665-1995 (R2001) Guide for Generating Station Grounding
IEEE 837-1989(R1996) Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in
Substation Grounding
IEEE 1050-1996 Guide for Instrumentation and Control Grounding in Generating
Stations
IEEE 1100-1999 IEEE Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding
Electronic Equipment. (IEEE Emerald Book)
IEEE 1246-1997 Guide for Temporary Protective Grounding Systems Used in
Substations
IEEE C57.13.3-1983 (R1990) Guide for the Grounding of Instrument Transformer
Secondary Circuits and Cases
IEEE C57.13.3-1983 (R1991) Guide for the Grounding of Instrument Transformer
Secondary Circuits and Cases
NFPA 70 The National Electrical Code
SUBMITTALS
A.
Conform to the General Provisions.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data and specification sheets for each
manufacturer's product described in Part 2 of this Section, marked to show which products
are proposed for this project.
C.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Qualifications" in Part 1 of this
Section.
D.
Acceptance Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:
1.
Test procedures used.
2.
Test results that comply with requirements.
3.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply
with requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
2.2
Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated building wire in accordance with Division
“Electrical” Section “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cable”. #6 AWG and
smaller shall have green insulation, #4 AWG and larger shall have green insulation or shall
be marked with green tape at each end.
CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A.
09/02/15
Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467. Products shall be NRTL-listed and shall be suitable
for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.
Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems
16060-3
2992/60270
B.
Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure type silicone bronze connectors for test joints at
ground rods with test (access) wells, and two-hole long barrel tin-plated copper
compression type at equipment busbars and bonding connections to structural steel.
C.
Grounding clamps for metal water pipe connections: all cast bronze parts with silicone
bronze bolts.
D.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's
written instructions.
E.
Wirenuts: Use only for branch circuit wiring in switch and receptacle outlet and junction
boxes containing #10 AWG and smaller wires.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION – GENERAL
A.
Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select
connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct
contact will be galvanically compatible.
1.
2.
3.
3.2
INSTALLATION: EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
Provide separate insulated equipment grounding conductors in raceways, boxes, and
fittings, as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
B.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations:
1.
3.3
Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to
make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent
future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
At switchgear, switchboards, distribution boards, panelboards, and motor control
centers, provide two-hole long-barrel tin-plated compression connector bolted to
ground busbar(s) with tin-plated or silicone bronze bolts.
INSTALLATION: EQUIPMENT BONDING JUMPERS
A.
At sheet metal junction, pull and outlet boxes, and electrical enclosures, use conduit hubs
bolted to enclosure or double locknuts to bond enclosure to conduit, and connect grounding
bushings to equipment grounding conductors. Install equipment bonding jumpers between
conduit bushings entering and leaving boxes, using the lugs provided with the grounding
bushings.
B.
At cast enclosures, connect equipment grounding conductors together with a mechanical
connector. Use mechanical connectors in conformance with Division “Electrical” Section
“Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cable”.
09/02/15
Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems
16060-4
2992/60270
C.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressuretype grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated
with winged pressure-type connectors.
D.
Signal and Communication Systems: For telecommunications systems, provide No. 6
AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode
system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment
location.
1.
2.
E.
3.4
3.6
Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Antenna Fixtures: Provide a ground rod exothermically
welded to an insulated #6 AWG solid copper grounding electrode conductor and bonded
to the antenna pole in addition to installing a separate equipment grounding conductor with
supply branch-circuit conductors, as shown on the Drawings.
INSTALLATION: BONDING JUMPERS
A.
3.5
Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate
grounding conductor on a 1/4 x 2 x 2 inch ground bus.
Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding
terminal.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so equipment vibration is not transmitted to rigidly
mounted equipment support structure. Use long-barrel tin-plated compression connectors
and galvanized steel or silicone bronze hex head cap screws in drilled and tapped holes to
bond miscellaneous equipment to equipment grounding conductors.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according
to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.
B.
Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct
circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by
connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a
visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding
conductor.
ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A.
Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1.
After installing grounding system and before electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for conformance with requirements.
2.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification, Section 7.13 "Grounding Systems". Certify
conformance with test parameters.
B.
Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1.
Test procedures used.
09/02/15
Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems
16060-5
2992/60270
2.
3.
Test results that conform to requirements.
Test results that do not conform to requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve conformance with requirements.
END OF SECTION
09/02/15
Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems
Page Intentionally Left Blank
16095-1
2992/60270
SECTION 16095
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Provide electrical equipment nameplates, junction, pull and outlet box labels, raceway
identification, wiremarkers, circuit identification, and warning signs for electrical
equipment included in this Contract, as specified herein.
B.
This Section includes product and installation requirements for identification of electrical
equipment, raceways, conductors, circuits, and outlets, and warning signs.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
1.3
1.4
Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following
codes, standards and specifications, except where more stringent requirements have been
specified herein:
1.
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
2.
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)
3.
NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace®
4.
NFPA 79 Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall have accreditation to ISO 9000:2000 or an equivalent
quality management system acceptable to the Engineer, and shall offer NRTL-listed and
labeled products.
B.
Comply with NFPA and OSHA standards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Make submittals in accordance with the General Provisions.
B.
Submittals shall include the following:
1.
Product data
2.
Complete list of all engraved nameplates.
3.
Sample of each of the following:
a.
engraved equipment nameplate
b.
computer-generated label
c.
wiremarkers
d.
safety signs
e.
laminated instrument tags
09/02/15
Identification For Electrical Systems
16095-2
2992/60270
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES
A.
Provide custom nameplates for all equipment listed in Part 3 of this Section.
B.
Nameplates shall have white letters engraved on black field, and shall be fabricated from
3-layer (black-white-black) thermoset plastic.
C.
Drill holes in nameplates to be fastened with tie-wraps as described in Part 3 of this Section.
D.
Nameplate lettering to be uppercase Roman block letters, minimum height as follows:
1.
MCCs, VFCs, panelboards, and transformers: 1/2 inch.
2.
Process Control Panels (unless factory-labeled): 1/2 inch.
3.
Valve actuators: 3/8 inch.
4.
Other equipment: 1/4-inch minimum.
PUNCHED TAPE LABELS (RECEPTACLE IDENTIFICATION)
A.
Punched Tape Labels for identification of receptacle circuits shall be 1/2 -inch black tape
with white raised lettering.
B.
Manufacturer: Dymo or approved equal
WIREMARKERS
A.
Wiremarkers shall be computer-printed on white wrap-around paper with clear plastic
protective "tail" and pressure-sensitive adhesive.
B.
Manufacturer: Brady, T&B, Panduit, or approved equal.
WIRE COLOR CODING
A.
Comply with NEC requirements for applying color-coding.
B.
Color Coding for service, feeder, and branch circuit wiring shall be as follows:
1.
208 / 120 VOLTS
A-B-C-N-G
Black - Red - Blue - White - Green
2.
240 / 120 VOLTS
A-B-C-N-G
Black - Red - Blue - White - Green
3.
480 / 277 VOLTS
A-B-C-N-G
Brown - Orange - Yellow - Gray - Green
C.
Color coding for 120 VAC control wiring shall be as follows:
1.
Line - Black
2.
Neutral - White
3.
Ground - Green
4.
Switched - any color except black, white, and green.
D.
Color coding for twisted shielded pair and twisted shielded triple signal cable conductors
shall be the manufacturer's standard insulation colors.
E.
Color coding for DC power and control circuit wires:
09/02/15
Identification For Electrical Systems
16095-3
2992/60270
1.
2.
3.
2.5
2.6
Negative polarity - Black
Positive polarity - Red
Switched - any color except black, red, white, and green.
CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify exposed unpainted conduits with a black indelible felt-tip marker.
B.
Identify exposed painted conduits with laminated tags fastened with nylon ties.
WARNING SIGNS
A.
Provide warning signs on electrical equipment, electrical room doors, and automatically
started mechanical equipment in accordance with NEC and OSHA requirements.
B.
Electrical Room warning signs shall have the legend "Danger - High Voltage - Authorized
Personnel Only".
C.
Automatically started motor-driven equipment shall have warning signs with the legend:
"Warning - This Equipment Starts and Stops Automatically".
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.1
3.2
3.3
NAMEPLATES
A.
Fabricate equipment nameplates using the description and tag number nomenclature shown
on the Drawings.
B.
Provide equipment nameplates for switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, circuit
breakers, transfer switches, panelboards, enclosed motor controllers and contactors,
transformers, disconnect switches, motor control centers, valve actuators, and major fire
alarm system components.
C.
Fasten nameplates to clean flat metal surfaces with pressure-sensitive two-sided adhesive
tape.
D.
Fasten nameplates to valve actuators with nylon tie-wraps.
RECEPTACLES
A.
Label all receptacle circuits on device faceplates with punched (Dymo) tape.
B.
Provide the following information after load balancing is complete:
1.
Panel Designations (as shown on the Panelboard Schedules)
2.
Branch Circuit Breaker Number
WIRE COLOR CODING AND MARKING
A.
09/02/15
Color code each phase, neutral, and ground wire for service conductors, feeders, and branch
circuits, at points of origin and termination of wires.
Identification For Electrical Systems
16095-4
2992/60270
B.
3.4
3.5
3.6
Provide wiremarkers on all control and signal wires, as shown on the approved Loop
Diagrams, Motor Control Wiring diagrams, and Control Panel field wiring diagrams.
CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Clean unpainted conduit surfaces with mineral spirits. Write conduit number shown on the
Conduit & Wire Schedules on each conduit at each exposed conduit termination point.
B.
Attached conduit identification labels to painted conduits with nylon tie-wraps.
WARNING SIGNS
A.
Fasten Electrical Room warning signs to doors with self-tapping tamper-resistant stainless
screws.
B.
Suspend automatically started equipment warning signs above motors with chain hangers.
C.
Install warning signs required by OSHA in accordance with OSHA recommendations.
PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES
A.
During construction, provide handwritten panelboard schedules. After load balancing has
been completed, provide complete typewritten directory with protective clear plastic cover
for each panelboard, with name of load as shown on the Panelboard Schedules on the
Drawings for each individual branch circuit.
B.
Lighting, receptacle, and appliance branch circuits shall be identified with room names in
the panel directory.
C.
When branch circuits are relocated, the panel directory shall be updated to indicate
functions and locations.
D.
When branch circuits are removed the panel directory shall be updated to indicate a spare.
E.
Handwritten directory shall be provided until all circuits are connected. After panelboard
acceptance testing and load balancing, install the permanent directory.
END OF SECTION
09/02/15
Identification For Electrical Systems
16110-1
2992/60270
SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Provide a complete system of raceways, including conduit, fittings, terminal boxes,
hangers, supports, and accessories, as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Related requirements are also included in the following Division “Electrical” Sections:
1.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for equipment grounding
requirements.
In addition to the definitions in Division “Electrical” Section “Electrical”, the following
definitions apply to this Section:
1.
Clamp-back: spacer used with conduit one-hole strap to provide air gap between
surface and conduit
2.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing (NEC definition)
3.
ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing
4.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylenediene terpolymer rubber
5.
Equipment bonding jumper: suitable for connecting sections of conduit used for
equipment grounding conductor (see NEC definition)
6.
FMC: Flexible metal conduit (NEC definition)
7.
FRP: fiberglass reinforced plastic
8.
ID: inside diameter
9.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit (NEC definition)
10.
LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (NEC definition)
11.
LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit
12.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber
13.
NPT: National pipe thread
14.
OD: outside diameter
15.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride
16.
RAC: Rigid aluminum conduit
17.
RGS: Rigid galvanized steel conduit
18.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit (NEC definition)
19.
RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit (NEC definition) includes PVC and RTRC
20.
RTRC: Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (fiberglass conduit - NEC
definition)
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
09/25/15
Comply with the following standards:
1.
NEMA Standards applicable to raceways, boxes, and fittings.
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems
16110-2
2992/60270
2.
3.
1.5
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
1.7
UL Standards applicable to raceways, boxes, and fittings. Each raceway, box, and
fitting shall be NRTL-listed and labeled.
ANSI and ASTM standards mentioned in this Section and included in the UL and
NEMA Standards applicable to raceways, boxes, and fittings.
Provide raceways, boxes, and fittings fabricated from materials resistant to corrosion and
suitable for the application in the locations where installed, in conformance with NEC
requirements for installation in “damp”, “wet”, and hazardous (classified) areas.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
B.
Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the
items involved:
1.
Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.
2.
HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit
groups with common supports.
3.
Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, fittings, hangers,
enclosures, cabinets, and supports with other construction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70 and NEMA standards.
C.
PVC-coated conduit, boxes, and fittings that are connected together shall be from the same
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUIT, BOX, AND FITTING MANUFACTURERS
A.
09/22/15
Provide products by the following manufacturers:
1.
Adalet / A Scott Fetzer Company
2.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
3.
Alflex Inc.
4.
Allied Tube & Conduit Corporation
5.
Allied Tube and Conduit Div. / A TYCO International Ltd. Company
6.
Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems
16110-3
2992/60270
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
2.2
Appleton
Bell
Carlon
Cooper / B-Line
Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
Electri-Flex Co.
Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company.
Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.
Hoffman.
Hubbell, Inc. / RACO
Hubbell, Inc./ Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
Lew Electric Fittings Co.
LTV Steel Tubular Products Company
Myers
O-Z Gedney
Perma-Cote
Pittsburgh Standard Conduit Co.,
RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
Robroy Industries
Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division.
Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Triangle PWC Co.
Wheatland Tube Co.
Or approved equal.
RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A.
Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): hot dip galvanized exterior and interior to ANSI
C80.1, threads hot dip galvanized after fabrication, for use in accordance with NEC Article
“Rigid Metal Conduit: Type RMC”, NRTL-listed and labeled under UL 6. Threads shall
be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
B.
Provide RMC locknuts, bushings, fittings, conduit bodies, junction boxes, pull boxes, and
outlet boxes as follows:
1.
NEMA ratings: in accordance with Part 3 of this Section
2.
Locknuts: galvanized steel. Locknuts on outside of NEMA 12 sheet metal enclosures shall be sealing O-ring type.
3.
Bushings: galvanized steel or malleable iron, insulated-throat grounding type, with
thermoset plastic insulation insert, complete with mechanical ground lug for
connection to ground wire.
4.
Fittings: ANSI 80.4, hot-dip galvanized cast steel or malleable iron. Conduit hubs
or similar approved fittings shall be provided for conduit entry to water and dustresistant enclosures. Use aluminum fittings with aluminum conduit.
5.
Conduit bodies: galvanized cast steel or malleable iron Form 8 with oil-resistant
gasket and galvanized cast steel or malleable iron cover. Use cast aluminum conduit bodies with aluminum conduit.
09/22/15
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems
16110-4
2992/60270
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.3
2.4
LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)
A.
Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC): Flexible steel type UA conduit with PVC
jacket, for use in accordance with NEC Article “Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Type
LFMC”, NRTL-listed and labeled under UL 360. Non-UL listed LFMC is not ac-ceptable.
B.
Fittings: Insulated-throat screw-in connectors, NEMA FB 1, UL 514B, galvanized malleable iron or steel. Connectors shall be suitable for use as grounding fittings. Provide fittings with bonding jumper connections for exterior bonding jumpers at motors. Nonstainless steel parts shall be PVC-coated when used with PVC-coated RGS conduit.
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)
A.
2.5
Flexible metal conduit (FMC): Galvanized steel flexible steel conduit, for use in
accordance with NEC Article "Flexible Metal Conduit: Type FMC", NRTL listed and
labeled.
CABLE TRAY
A.
2.6
Junction boxes: galvanized cast steel or malleable iron with oil-resistant gasket and
galvanized cast steel or malleable iron cover in non-hazardous areas, cast or
malleable iron external screw cover type in hazardous (classified) areas for other
than aluminum conduit. Use cast aluminum junction boxes with aluminum
conduit.
Pull boxes: painted or stainless steel fabricated sheet metal type with hinged screw
cover in non-hazardous areas, cast aluminum with hinged bolted cover in
hazardous (classified) areas for other than aluminum conduit. Use cast aluminum
pull-boxes with aluminum conduits.
Outlet boxes: Type FS or FD for exposed locations in non-hazardous areas, cast or
malleable iron external screw cover type in hazardous (classified) areas for other
than aluminum conduit. Use cast aluminum FS or FD outlet boxes in exposed
locations in non-hazardous areas and cast aluminum external screw cover type in
hazardous (classified) areas with aluminum conduit.
Terminal boxes: Enclosures for terminal blocks and electrical equipment and
components: NEMA 250, with interior white painted steel panel, and hinged cover.
Stainless steel sheet metal with flush 1/4-turn latch for non-hazardous areas, cast
aluminum with hinged and bolted cast cover for hazardous (classified) locations.
Manufacturers
1.
Cope
2.
Cooper / B-Line
3.
Unistrut
4.
Or approved equal
SINGLE CONDUIT HANGERS
A.
09/22/15
Manufacturers:
1.
Appleton
2.
Crouse-Hinds
3.
Erico International Corporation (Caddy)
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems
16110-5
2992/60270
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.7
2.8
Killark
Thomas and Betts (Kindorf, Steel City)
Unistrut
Or approved equal
B.
Single IMC and RMC attachment to structural steel: galvanized malleable iron PC (parallel
clamp), EC (edge clamp), and RC (right angle clamp) type conduit-to-structural-steel
clamps, or galvanized steel clevis hangers on galvanized steel threaded rods at-tached to
galvanized malleable iron beam clamps. Bolts shall be galvanized steel. Use PVC-coated
clamps with RAC.
C.
Single IMC and RMC attachment to concrete and masonry surfaces: galvanized malle-able
iron one-hole clamp and galvanized malleable iron clamp-back, or galvanized steel clevis
hangers on galvanized steel threaded rods attached to galvanized steel rod hanger fitting
bolted to concrete with expansion bolts. Bolts shall be galvanized steel. Use PVC-coated
clamps with RAC.
MULTIPLE CONDUIT HANGERS (CHANNEL SUPPORTS)
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Aickinstrut
2.
Cooper B-Line
3.
GS Metals Inc.
4.
Thomas & Betts (Kindorf)
5.
Unistrut
6.
Or approved equal
B.
Steel channel and associated hardware and fittings:
1.
1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inch nominal size, minimum. UL 5B listed and labeled. Thickness as
required for the application, minimum 0.071 inches.
2.
Deflection of individual support channels shall not exceed 1/180 of span when
loaded with conduit plus 200 pounds.
3.
Electro-galvanized: Electrolytically zinc coated conforming to ASTM B633 Type
III SC1.
4.
Pre-galvanized: Zinc coated by hot-dip process prior to roll forming. Zinc weight
shall be G90 conforming to ASTM A 653.
5.
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication: Zinc-coated after all manufacturing and
forming operations are completed. Zinc coating conforming to ASTM A 123 or A
153.
6.
Stainless steel: Type 304 or better
7.
Bolts: Grade 3 or better. Finish and materials to match channel, except that electroplated bolts shall be used with electro-galvanized steel channel, and stainless
steel bolts shall be used with pre-galvanized, galvanized channel.
8.
Conduit straps: PVC-coated galvanized steel with corrosion-resistant bolt.
CONDUIT SLEEVES AND SEALING FITTINGS
A.
09/22/15
Manufacturers:
1.
Appleton
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems
16110-6
2992/60270
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.9
B.
Wall and Floor Sleeves:
1.
Hot-dip galvanized steel or stainless steel pre-fabricated conduit sleeves with
welded water-stop ring.
2.
Galvanized steel, PVC, and polyethylene sleeves that are part of a manufacturer’s
standard wall seal assembly are also acceptable, subject to compliance with the fire
resistant rating of the related walls and floors.
C.
Conduit-to-Sleeve Sealing Fittings:
1.
Synthetic elastomeric gland with galvanized steel or stainless steel compression
plates sized for the conduit OD and sleeve ID, or a manufactured assembly of hotdip galvanized or stainless steel pressure plates, neoprene sealing grommets, and
cast or malleable iron sealing bodies with zinc-rich epoxy coating, with factoryassembled galvanized steel, PVC, or polyethylene pipe sleeve. Segmented seals
are also acceptable for conduit 4-inch trade size and larger.
2.
Sealing fittings for wall penetrations with water or soil on one side shall have seals
installed at both ends of the conduit sleeve or core-drilled hole.
3.
Where single conductors pass through a single sleeve, select materials to mitigate
the effects of inductive heating.
4.
Provide ground wire attachment bolts for manufactured sleeve assemblies.
5.
Seals shall have fire ratings equal to the fire-resistant rating of the wall.
CONDUIT INTERIOR SEALING FITTINGS
A.
2.10
Crouse-Hinds
Spring City Electric
Thomas & Betts
O.Z. Gedney
Or approved equal
Manufacturers:
1.
Crouse-Hinds
2.
O.Z. Gedney
3.
Thomas & Betts
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
2.
EGS/Appleton Electric.
3.
Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
4.
Hoffman.
5.
Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.
6.
O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
7.
RACO; a Hubbell Company.
09/22/15
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems
16110-7
2992/60270
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.
Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
Or approved equal.
C.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
D.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, [ferrous alloy] [aluminum], Type FD,
with gasketed cover.
E.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
F.
Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, [cast aluminum] [galvanized,
cast iron] with gasketed cover.
G.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 12, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch,
unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard
enamel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
RACEWAY APPLICATIONS
A.
Indoor raceways, boxes, and fittings:
1.
Exposed: RGS in above-grade, exposed locations.
2.
Connections to transformers, motor-driven equipment, vibrating equipment, and
equipment requiring position adjustment, e.g., rail-mounted motors: liquidtight
flexible metal conduit in non-hazardous areas.
3.
Conduit Support Channels: electrogalvanized.
4.
Boxes and fittings: as described in each raceway sub-section, and recommended
as suitable for the particular application by the manufacturer.
5.
Enclosures: as specified in Division “Electrical” Section “Electrical”.
B.
Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size except that ½ inch trade size may be used for
lighting whips above suspended ceilings.
INSTALLATION – GENERAL
A.
Deliver raceways, boxes, and fittings to job site in factory packaging. Store in clean, dry,
weatherproof locations. Handle in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B.
Install raceways, boxes, and fittings in accordance with manufacturer’s installation
instructions and NEC requirements as a minimum, and comply with the additional
requirements described in this Section.
09/22/15
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems
16110-8
2992/60270
C.
Conduits shall be electrically and mechanically continuous, and suitable for use as an
equipment-grounding conductor. Make up threaded joints wrench tight. However conduits
will not be depended on as a grounding path, a separate ground conductor shall be pulled
for each field device.
D.
When Coordination Drawings are specified in Part 1 of this Section, do not commence
work until coordination drawings for the entire building are approved.
E.
Comply with NEC requirements for sizing outlet and junction boxes to accommodate
wires, splices, and devices.
F.
Bends and offsets between pull points shall not exceed a cumulative total of 270 degrees
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Maximum distance between pull points in
conduit systems inside buildings shall be 100 feet unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
G.
Raceways shall be routed in conformance with the following guidelines:
1.
Run conduits exposed, concealed, and underground as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
The preferred location for horizontal conduit runs is just below the ceiling
structural supports.
3.
Do not obstruct access to equipment for operation and maintenance. Coordinate
conduit runs with the work of other trades. Plan conduit runs to avoid lighting
fixtures, and leave space for easy access to HVAC equipment, motors, and duct
access hatches and doors.
4.
Route conduits around doors, windows, hatches, louvers, and other building
openings, and around range and fume hoods.
5.
Group conduits on horizontal trapeze hangers or on wall-mounted steel channel
where long horizontal runs are required.
6.
Do not run conduits through stairwells unless required for connection to equipment
located in the stairwell.
7.
Maintain eight feet minimum clearance above finished floor wherever it is
physically possible to do so. Comply with OSHA requirements for minimum
headroom.
8.
Comply with raceway, boxes, and fitting details shown on the Drawings.
9.
Provide seals and flashings at roof penetrations in accordance with the
recommendations of the roofing system supplier, or as shown on the Drawings.
10.
Where conduits enter the top of electrical equipment enclosures and control panels,
install conduit interior sealing fittings to prevent entry of water and condensation
from conduit.
11.
Concealed conduits shall not be run below floor slabs in basements unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Run concealed conduits embedded in
basement floor slab.
H.
Cut conduits square with roller-wheel pipe cutter. Hacksaw cuts are acceptable only if the
entire conduit is swabbed clean after cutting and threading is completed. Conduits cut in
the field shall be threaded with sharp, standard NPT dies to achieve a fully cut tapered
thread with a minimum of five full tapered threads at the end of the conduit. Running
threads are not acceptable. Over- and under-threading are not acceptable. After threading,
ream conduit ends, remove cuttings and debris from inside and outside of conduit,
degrease, and apply cold spray-on zinc-rich paint.
09/22/15
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems
16110-9
2992/60270
I.
Conduit bends shall be made with conduit bending tools manufactured for the purpose.
Comply with conduit and bending tool manufacturers’ instructions. Use specially sized
shoes in bending tools for PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel conduits.
J.
Do not cut or drill holes in structural beams and columns, or other structural members. Do
not weld raceway supports to structural steel.
K.
Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints wrench
tight. Comply with NEC requirements for minimum thread engagement in Hazardous
Classified areas.
L.
Provide expansion, deflection, or expansion & deflection couplings at building expansion
joints. Expansion and deflection fittings shall comply with UL 467 and UL 514B, and shall
be suitable for the anticipated amount of movement and direction(s) of movement.
M.
Provide drain fittings at the first junction or pull box where conduits enter the building
from outdoor and underground locations. Locate drains to permit observation of leakage
without damage to electrical and mechanical equipment.
N.
Three-piece (Erickson) couplings shall be used where it is not possible to turn conduits to
make up threaded joints. Threadless fittings are not generally acceptable. Application for
permission to use threadless fittings at particular locations shall be made in writing to the
Engineer, and threadless fittings shall not be used unless approved.
O.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
P.
Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and
installation requirements are specified in Division “Thermal and Moisture Protection”
Section "Penetration Firestopping".
Q.
Boxes and poke-through assemblies in fire-rated floors and walls shall be UL-listed for the
application. Comply with UL and manufacturer’s requirements for installation.
R.
Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and
keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
S.
Terminations:
1.
Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to
enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts,
one inside and one outside box. Install bushings wrench-tight.
2.
Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings
tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples
are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no
threads are exposed.
3.
Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
T.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with
not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull
wire.
09/22/15
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems
16110-10
2992/60270
3.3
U.
Install explosion-proof and moisture seal-off fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible
locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install
each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of
adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:
1.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of
refrigerated spaces.
2.
At hazardous classified locations and where otherwise required by the NEC.
V.
Flexible Connections:
1.
Recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures: maximum of 72 inches of flexible
metal conduit with UL-listed grounding fittings
2.
Motors and equipment subject to vibration or movement: maximum 36 inches of
LFMC up to 2 inch trade size, up to 72 inches in larger sizes, and explosion-proof
couplings of adequate length for the installed conditions in hazardous (classified)
locations.
3.
Install separate equipment bonding jumper across flexible connections where
required by the NEC.
W.
Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to
above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum
of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where
necessary to comply with these requirements.
INSTALLATION – EXPOSED RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
A.
Install raceways, boxes, and fittings exposed as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural
members.
1.
Run raceways together in-groups on common supports wherever possible.
2.
Do not use mechanical piping or ceiling supports to support conduit runs.
C.
Make concentric bends in parallel exposed conduit runs. Use factory elbows only where
elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.
D.
Surface-mounted channel supports shall be 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch channel bolted to wall
or ceiling with expansion anchors.
E.
Suspended (trapeze) channel supports shall be 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch channel suspended
from minimum 3/8 inch threaded rod. Fasten rods to structural steel with beam clamps or
channel assemblies designed specifically for each application. Fasten threaded rods to
concrete with expansion bolts and threaded rod hanger, or concrete channel inserts
F.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and mechanical piping
(including insulation). Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
G.
Install electrical enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
09/22/15
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems
16110-11
2992/60270
H.
3.4
3.5
INSTALLATION – CONCEALED RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
A.
Install raceways, boxes, and fittings concealed, including above suspended ceilings, in
partitions, and within or below floor slabs, as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance,
considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.
PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION
A.
3.6
3.7
At building interior floor and roof penetrations, provide floor sleeves 2 inches above
finished floor level with fire-rated conduit sealing fittings. Provide flashing at roof
penetrations in accordance with roofing system manufacturer’s recommendations.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings and finishes without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1.
Repair damage to galvanize finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
CLEANING & PAINTING
A.
Swab conduits clean after installation and plug ends until conductors are installed.
B.
Remove dust, construction debris, plaster and paint spatters from raceways, boxes, and
fittings after all trades have completed their work, and prior to painting.
C.
After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect
exposed finishes, touch up damage, and prepare for finish painting in accordance with
Specification Section 09900 entitled “Field Painting”.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify raceways, boxes, and fittings as described in Division “Electrical” Section
“Electrical Identification for Electrical Systems”.
END OF SECTION
09/22/15
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems
Page Intentionally Left Blank
16120-1
2992/60270
SECTION 16120
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.3
Related requirements are also specified in the following Division “Electrical” Sections:
1.
"Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification and color coding
requirements.
2.
“Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Provide a complete system of wiring and cabling, including wire and cable pulling,
splicing, and termination accessories, as shown on the Drawings and in conformance with
the requirements in this Section and Division “Electrical” Section “Electrical”.
In addition to the definitions in Division “Electrical” Section “Electrical”, the following
definitions apply to this Section:
1.
MI: Mineral Insulated
2.
MTW: machine tool wire, 90 deg. C max in dry locations, 60 deg. C max in wet
locations
3.
NMC: non-metallic jacketed cable
4.
RTD: resistance temperature detector
5.
SE: service entrance cable
6.
THHN: NEC and UL designation for flame-retardant and heat resistant
thermoplastic insulation, gas and oil resistant nylon jacketed, suitable for dry
locations only, 90 deg. C. max in dry locations
7.
THW: NEC and UL designation for flame-retardant, moisture resistant
thermoplastic insulation suitable for dry and wet locations, 75 deg. C. max
8.
THWN: NEC and UL designation for flame retardant and moisture-resistant
thermoplastic insulation, gas and oil resistant nylon jacketed, suitable for dry and
wet locations, 75 deg. C. max in wet locations
9.
TSP: twisted shielded pair
10.
UF: underground feeder
11.
USE: underground service entrance cable
12.
XHHW: NEC and UL designation for (thermoset) cross-linked synthetic polymer
insulation suitable for dry and wet locations, 90 deg. C. max in dry locations, 75
deg. C max in wet locations
13.
XHHW-2: NEC designation for (thermoset) cross-linked synthetic polymer
insulation suitable for dry and wet locations, 90 deg. C. max in wet and dry
locations.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
09/02/15
Conform to the following standards in effect at the time of bid submittal:
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
16120-2
2992/60270
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
1.5
1.6
AEIC CG5-90 Underground Extruded Power Cable Pulling Guide
ICEA P-51-432-1970 Copper Conductors, Bare & Weather Resistant
ICEA P-56-520-1984 Cable Tray Fire Test Report (Round Robin Project)
ICEA S-58-679-1996 Standard for Control Cable Conductor Identification
ICEA S-95-658 / NEMA WC70 Non-Shielded Power Cables Rated 2000 V or Less
ICEA T-22-294-1983 Test Procedures for Extended Time-Testing of Wire and
Cable Insulations for Service in Wet Locations
ICEA T-29-520-1986 Vertical Cable Tray Flame Tests @ 210,000 Btu
ICEA T-30-520-1986 Vertical Cable Tray Flame Tests @ 70,000 Btu
ICEA T-33-655-1994 Low Smoke, Halogen-Free Polymeric Jackets
IEEE 576-2000 Recommended Practice for Installation, Termination, and Testing
of Insulated Power Cable as Used in Industrial and Commercial Applications
UL 4 Armored Cable
UL 44 Thermoset–insulated Wires and Cables
UL 62 Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire
UL 83 Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cable
UL 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors
UL 486B Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors
UL 486C Splicing Wire Connectors
UL 486D Insulated Wire Connector Systems for Underground Use in Damp or
Wet Locations
UL 493 Thermoplastic Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch Circuit Cables
UL 1569 Metal-Clad Cable
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product specified herein, including catalog data, technical
specifications, evidence of UL listing, and evidence of manufacturer’s certification to ISO
9000:2000 or an equivalent quality management system certification acceptable to the
Engineer.
B.
Qualifications and experience proposal for the electrical testing firm.
C.
Electrical Acceptance Test reports.
D.
Operation and maintenance data is not required, however, approved shop drawing
submittals are required to be included for the record in the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals, as described in Division “Electrical” Section “Electrical”.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain all wire and cable of a particular type through one source from
a single qualified manufacturer.
B.
To be a qualified manufacturer, wire, cable, splice and termination components
manufacturers shall have accreditation to ISO 9000:2000 or an equivalent quality
management system acceptable to the Engineer, and shall offer NRTL-listed and labeled
products.
09/02/15
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
16120-3
2992/60270
C.
Testing firm shall be qualified as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, shall be a member
of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association, shall be acceptable to the AHJ, and
shall have supervision as follows:
1.
Testing Firm's Field Supervisor: Qualifications and experience for the person
currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the
National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise onsite testing specified in Part 3.
D.
Wire and cable and accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NEC Article 100, by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
APPLICATIONS
A.
2.2
2.3
Refer to Part 3 for wire and cable applications.
BUILDING WIRE AND MULTI-CONDUCTOR POWER CABLES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Alcan Cable, Div. of Alcan Aluminum Corp.
2.
American Insulated Wire Corp.
3.
Belden Wire and Cable Co.
4.
Cerro Wire and Cable Co., Inc.
5.
General Cable Industries Inc.
6.
Okonite Co.
7.
Pirelli Cable Corp.
8.
Rome Cable Corp.
9.
Southwire Co.
10.
Or approved equal.
B.
Conductor Material: Copper, solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded for
No. 8 AWG and larger.
C.
Building Wire and Multi-conductor Cable Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN .
D.
Multiconductor Power Cables: Nonmetallic sheathed cable, Type NM with integral ground
wire.
CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION WIRE AND CABLE
A.
09/02/15
Manufacturers:
1.
Belden Wire and Cable Co.
2.
Clifford of Vermont / TVC
3.
General Cable Co., Inc.
4.
Okonite Co.
5.
Rome Cable Corp.
6.
Southwire Co.
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
16120-4
2992/60270
7.
2.4
2.5
Or approved equal.
B.
Control wire: 600V type THWN insulated stranded copper conductors in conduit,
minimum size #14 AWG, UL listed and suitable for installation in conduit.
C.
Power-limited cable run concealed in building finishes:
D.
Power-limited tray cable, in cable tray: Multi-conductor type THHN/THWN, minimum
size #14 AWG, with overall galvanized steel armor and PVC outer sheath. UL listed and
suitable for installation in conduit and cable tray.
E.
Instrumentation cable, TSP for 4-20 mA DC circuits:
1.
For installation in the same handholes, manholes, and pullboxes with power cables:
600 V TFFN insulated #16 AWG stranded tinned copper twisted pair, with #18
AWG or larger stranded tinned copper drain wire, overall aluminum-on-mylar
shield (100% coverage), with chrome PVC outer jacket, maximum outside
diameter 0.30 inches. NRTL listed and suitable for installation in conduit, cable
tray, and direct burial.
2.
For installation in dedicated shielded signal cable raceways: 300 V TFFN insulated
#16 AWG stranded tinned copper twisted pair, with #18 AWG or larger stranded
tinned copper drain wire, overall aluminum-on-mylar shield (100% coverage),
with chrome PVC outer jacket, maximum outside diameter 0.25 inches. NRTL
listed and suitable for installation in conduit, cable tray, and direct burial.
3.
Cables installed in cable tray shall be multiple TSP type with additional shield
overall.
F.
Instrumentation cable, twisted shielded triple for RTDs: 600 V TFFN insulated #16 AWG
stranded tinned copper twisted triple, with #18 AWG or larger stranded tinned copper drain
wire, overall aluminum-on-mylar shield, with chrome PVC outer jacket. NRTL listed and
suitable for installation in conduit and cable tray.
ARMORED CABLE FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc
2.
Burndy
3.
Hubbell/Anderson
4.
O-Z/Gedney, EGS Electrical Group LLC
5.
Thomas and Betts
6.
Or approved equal.
B.
Armored cable fittings shall be fabricated from copper-free aluminum, stainless steel, and
galvanized steel components, with mechanical compression gland, and shall be NRTLlisted as a type suitable for grounding the metal cable sheath to the electrical box or
enclosure.
WIRE AND CABLE CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A.
09/02/15
Manufacturers:
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
16120-5
2992/60270
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3M Company, Electrical Products Division
AMP Incorporated / Tyco International
Burndy
Square D
Thomas and Betts
Or approved equal.
B.
Splicing shall be avoided unless approved by the engineer. All connections shall be
complete runs.
C.
All equipment grounding shall be complete home-runs. Splicing of equipment ground
connections is not acceptable.
D.
Description: Factory fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material,
type, and class for application and service indicated.
E.
Wirenuts: Spring type rated for copper wire, sized for the actual number of wires
connected.
F.
Splices: Tin-plated copper compression type. Pre-insulated crimp-on connectors may be
used for #14 AWG control wires. Long barrel splices shall be used for #1/0 AWG and
larger.
G.
Connection lugs: Tin-plated copper compression type with NEMA drilling. Long-barrel
lugs shall be used for #1/0 AWG and larger wire, and for ground wires as specified in
Division “Electrical” Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems".
H.
Connections at molded case circuit breakers, disconnect switches, and other equipment
provided with wire termination lugs: NRTL-listed, suitable for use with the copper wire
size to be connected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
3.3
Ensure that conduits and pullboxes are clean and clear of construction debris prior to
installation of wire and cable.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver wire and cables to construction site and unload in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
B.
Store and transport reels in conformance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.
C.
Wire and cable ends shall be taped watertight until terminations and splices are completed.
WIRE AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A.
09/02/15
Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
16120-6
2992/60270
3.4
3.5
CABLE LAYING AND PULLING
A.
Install cables in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions, IEEE 576 and
AEIC CG5-90.
B.
Run wires and cables in Conduit as shown on the Drawings and as specified in Division
“Electrical” Section “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems”.
C.
Use cable manufacturer approved water-based wire pulling lubricant for pulling in wire
and cables in conduit. Lubricant shall be UL-listed and shall be suitable for the conductor
insulation.
D.
Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall
pressure values.
E.
Pull wire and cables in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation recommendations
and requirements, with emphasis on the following:
1.
Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values
2.
Lubricate cables with pulling compound or lubricant that is approved by the cable
manufacturer and will not deteriorate conductor or insulation materials of
construction.
3.
Follow cable manufacturer’s recommendations for attaching pulling means to
cables, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave cable grips. Do not
attach to cable jacket alone for pulling.
4.
Rig pulleys and use pull ropes for pulling cables into raceways.
5.
Use tension indicators and electric-motor driven capstan rollers for pulling cables
that are too large for pulling by hand.
6.
Observe manufacturer’s recommendations for the minimum wire and cable
bending radius for each type and size of wire and cable provided for this project.
F.
Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division “Electrical” Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems".
WIRE AND CABLE CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to the manufacturer's published
torque tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
B.
For compression lugs and splices, use the lug manufacturer’s compression tools and
conform to the manufacturer’s written instructions.
C.
Control wires shall be run from terminal to terminal without splices, and no more than two
wires under a terminal screw.
D.
Splices and terminations shall be insulated with boots, heat shrink tubing, or tape to 600
volts in accordance with the insulation product manufacturer’s written instructions.
09/02/15
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
16120-7
2992/60270
3.6
E.
Feeder taps shall be made with cast bronze 2-bolt or 4-bolt connectors with built-in
conductor spacer, suitable for the run and tap conductor sizes. Split bolt connectors shall
not be used unless approved by the Engineer.
F.
Wiring at Device Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, leaving 8 inches (200 mm) of
wire coiled in the box for connection to wiring devices. Wiring devices that are suitable for
solid wire only shall be pigtailed to stranded wire with solid wire 6 inches long using
wirenuts.
G.
Install a green insulated NEC-sized grounding jumper from a green ground screw in the
outlet box to the receptacle or switch green ground screw.
H.
Wiring to terminals at transformers and busbars shall be connected with tin-plated copper
compression connectors and insulated for 600 volts with tape, boots, or heat-shrink tubing
rated for the temperature specified by the equipment manufacturer. Two hole lugs shall be
used for power cable terminations # 1/0 AWG and larger.
I.
Building wire connections to flexible motor leads shall be made with compression
connectors bolted back-to-back with silicone-bronze bolts and insulated for 600 volts. For
motors with busbar connections, connections shall be made with long-barrel two-hole tin
plated copper lugs, copper-plated belleville washers, and silicone bronze bolts.
J.
Multi-conductor cables shall be installed and terminated in accordance with the cable
manufacturer’s installation instructions. Armored and metal clad cables shall be terminated
with fittings suitable for grounding.
K.
Shielded cable conductors shall be terminated with insulated crimp-on connectors suitable
for the terminals provided with the equipment, or tinned for connection to terminals which
are not suitable for crimp-on connectors. A minimum two inch length of heat shrink tubing
shall be applied over each insulated conductor and the insulated portion of the crimp-on
connector, and a separate piece of larger diameter heat shrink tubing shall cover the end of
the cable jacket and cut shield, and overlap the individual conductor heat shrink tubing.
Connect drain wire to the ground bus at the transmitter end only except where otherwise
indicated on the Contract Drawings and approved shop drawings.
L.
MI cable terminations shall be watertight mechanical compression type, and shall be as
recommended by the MI cable manufacturer for the application.
COMPUTER AND CONTROL SYSTEM DATA HIGHWAY CABLES
A.
3.7
Computer and network cables will be furnished under other Sections of the Specification,
and shall be installed in raceways as indicated on the Drawings.
ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A.
09/02/15
Testing: Perform the following field quality control testing:
1.
After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for conformance with requirements.
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
16120-8
2992/60270
2.
B.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification, Section 7.3.2 "Cables, Low Voltage, 600 Volt
Maximum". Certify conformance with test parameters.
Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1.
Test procedures used.
2.
Test results that conform to requirements.
3.
Test results that do not conform to requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve conformance with requirements.
END OF SECTION
09/02/15
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
16410-1
2992/60270
SECTION 16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.3
Provide enclosed AC switches and circuit breakers rated 600 V and less, of the following
types:
1.
Fused Disconnect Switches
2.
Enclosed Circuit Breakers
Related Documents include the following Division “Electrical” Sections:
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals shall conform to the General Provisions.
B.
Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Include dimensions
and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,
ratings, UL listing, and finishes.
C.
Shop Drawings: For each automatic transfer switch.
1.
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a.
Each installed unit's type and details.
b.
Nameplate legends.
c.
Short-circuit withstand current rating.
d.
UL listing.
2.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
D.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
E.
Field quality-control test reports.
F.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1.
Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed switches and circuit breakers and
all installed components.
2.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
09/02/15
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
16410-2
2992/60270
1.4
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in
Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers of a single type through
one source from a single manufacturer.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Store enclosed switches and circuit breakers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform
temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed switches and circuit breakers from
exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.
Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Engineer no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of
electrical service.
2.
Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.
3.
Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Engineer's written
permission.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed switches and circuit breakers with other
construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain
required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and
panels.
B.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division “Concrete”
Specification Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
09/02/15
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
16410-3
2992/60270
1.8
SPARE PARTS
A.
Furnish spare parts described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Spare Fuses: Furnish one spare for every five installed, but no fewer than one set
of three of each type and rating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
GENERAL
A.
Enclosure types shall be as specified in Division “Electrical” Section "Electrical".
B.
Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall be UL listed.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.3
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
ABB Power Distribution, Inc.; ABB Control, Inc. Subsidiary.
2.
Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
3.
General Electrical Company; GE Industrial Systems.
4.
Siemens.
5.
Square D.
6.
Russelectric
7.
Automatic Switch Co. (ASCO)
NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A.
Non-fused disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty, 3-pole, 600 volt, motor-rated, visible
blade type, with cover interlock to prevent opening the door with the switch closed.
B.
Provide external operating handle with padlocking provisions. Switch shall be closed when
the handle is in the UP position, and open in the DOWN position. Rotary handles are not
acceptable.
C.
Provide insulated neutral bus when neutral wire is shown on the Drawings.
D.
Provide copper ground bus for equipment grounding conductors.
E.
Where indicated on the Drawings, and for variable frequency controller branch circuits,
provide auxiliary interlock contacts that open the motor control circuit before opening the
motor branch circuit.
F.
Non-fused disconnect switches shall be similar and equal to Square D Class 3110 Heavy
Duty Safety Switches.
09/02/15
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
16410-4
2992/60270
2.4
2.5
FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A.
Fused disconnect switches shall be equal to the non-fused disconnect switches described
above, except that fuse clips and fuses shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Fused disconnects used as service entrance equipment shall be U.L. listed and labeled
"Suitable for Use as Service Entrance Equipment".
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Enclosed circuit breakers shall be molded-case thermal-magnetic type, with trip and frame
ratings as shown on the Drawings, with cover interlock to prevent opening the door with
the circuit breaker closed.
B.
Provide external operating handle with padlocking provisions. Circuit breaker shall be
closed when the handle is in the UP position, and open in the DOWN position. Rotary
handles are not acceptable.
C.
Circuit breakers shall be fully rated for the available fault current. Series ratings are not
acceptable.
D.
Provide insulated neutral bus when neutral conductor is shown on the Drawings.
E.
Provide copper ground bus for equipment grounding conductors.
F.
Enclosed circuit breakers shall be similar and equal to Square D Class 610.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.3
For wall-mounted enclosures, bolt units to channels bolted to wall. For wall-mounted
enclosures not near walls, provide freestanding racks constructed from 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inch
channels.
Identify enclosed circuit breakers, components, and control wiring in conformance with
Division “Electrical” Section "Identification for Electrical Systems".
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker.
2.
Test continuity of each circuit.
B.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except optional
tests, stated in the following NETA Acceptance Testing Specification Inspection
and Test Procedures:
09/02/15
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
16410-5
2992/60270
2.
3.
a. 7.5.1.1 "Switches, Air, Low-Voltage"
b. 7.6.1.1 "Circuit Breakers, Air, Insulated-Case, Molded-Case".
Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION
09/02/15
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Page Intentionally Left Blank
17012-1
2992/60270
SECTION 17012
CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for the General Contractor to obtain the services of an
Instrumentation and Controls (I&C) Subcontractor who shall be responsible for the
coordination, supply, and integration of all equipment specified herein and specified in
referenced related Sections. This Subcontractor shall be referred to as the Control
Systems Integrator (CSI). The CSI shall have total responsibility for the coordination,
design, fabrication, configuration, programming, testing, start-up, commissioning, and
implementation of a complete and fully operational Process Control System (PCS) as
specified herein, specified elsewhere, and as shown on the Contract Drawings. The CSI is
ultimately responsible for providing a fully functioning system, not the Engineer.
Contract Drawings of PCS control panels and cabinets are only to be used as guidelines,
not as detailed design. Detailed design is done by the CSI as specified herein and
specified in referenced related Sections.
B.
The CSI shall configure, startup, and commission all instrumentation, instrumentation
equipment, and components not supplied by major equipment Vendors as part of their
scope.
C.
Vendor supplied instrumentation, instrumentation equipment, and components, valve
actuators, and other process control and monitoring equipment shall be configured by the
individual Vendors in accordance with the Contract Documents. Wiring from PCS
cabinets and enclosures to process control and monitoring equipment shall be in
conformance with the Loop Diagrams supplied by the CSI.
D.
The CSI shall make modifications to the existing Bubbler System Cabinet to
accommodate a PLC and supporting devices. A submersible level transducer will be
installed into the reservoir partition of the Distribution well. The copper piping inside the
wet well for the existing bubbler must be replaced by the contractor and relocated by the
contractor to the inside of the new wall so that it reads the proper level in the larger of the
two chambers. It must be fastened to the wall at the same height off the floor as it is now.
Two slide gates with electric actuators shall be installed in the partition wall and
determine the operating mode of the Distribution Well. A point-to-point wireless antenna
transmitter/receiver shall be installed to the exterior of the Distribution Well building to
provide communications and remote operation to the Reservoir Pumping Station.
REFERENCES
A.
09/02/15
Comply with the latest revision of the following codes, standards and specifications,
except where more stringent requirements have been specified herein:
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Control Systems Integrator
17012-2
2992/60270
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
1.3
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Owner’s Representatives (IEEE)
Instrument Society of America (ISA)
Joint Industry Council (JIC)
National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
National Electrical Code (NEC)
National Electrical Testing Association (NETA)
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
Related Specification Sections
1.
All Electrical Sections
2.
“Process Control Systems”
3.
“General Conditions/General Requirements”
4.
“Wireless Communications”
COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination with Process Mechanical Equipment Manufacturers and Vendors
1.
The CSI shall be responsible for coordinating with process mechanical
equipment manufacturers and vendors in order to obtain control system
requirements and special control components. The CSI shall review and
coordinate with the equipment manufacturer’s submittals.
2.
Initial Coordination Meeting: The CSI shall be responsible for scheduling and
holding an initial coordination meeting with the Owner, General Contractor,
Electrical Contractor, and the Owner’s Representative to review the scope and
schedule of the project. This meeting shall be attended by the CSI project
manager, and all other parties that shall be involved in the integration of the
Process Control System (PCS).
B.
Submittal Coordination with Equipment Manufacturers and Vendors
1.
The CSI shall obtain certain specific submittal information pertaining to control
equipment required to be furnished by equipment manufacturers and vendors.
This information shall include catalog data, project specific wiring diagrams and
shop drawings that shall be included in the CSI’s shop drawing submittals.
Control panel shop drawings submitted without the information on the specific
controls will be rejected. Therefore, it is the responsibility of the General
Contractor, Electrical Contractor, the CSI, and the specific manufacturers and
vendors of the equipment to coordinate the submittals for the equipment. Where
specified, panels shall be fabricated by, furnished by, and shall be the
responsibility of the CSI. Pertinent information on controls shall be submitted
with both the equipment submittals and the control panel shop drawings.
C.
Comply with the coordination requirements specified in related Specification Sections:
1.
“Process Control Systems”
2.
“General Conditions/General Requirements”
3.
“Wireless Communications”
09/02/15
Control Systems Integrator
17012-3
2992/60270
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
CSI Qualifications: Submit a detailed “CSI Qualifications Package” for the proposed
CSI to be assigned to this project. This qualifications package shall include the
following information, well organized, and formatted as follows:
1.
Company Background – Provide a brief company overview detailing the CSI’s
experience, capabilities, and available resources. Description of available
resources shall include labor categories, staffing, equipment, material
availability, testing equipment, and training staff and aids.
2.
Experience in Water Applications – Provide a list and detailed descriptions of
recent (last 7 years) projects involving Water Treatment Facilities that the CSI
has successfully performed. Each project shall be provided with the project
duration and date of completion. At the Owner Representative’s discretion, the
CSI shall provide “as-built” project documentation for complete system
integration service experience for a minimum of three completed projects
comparable in size, scope, and complexity.
3.
Project Personnel Plan – Provide a brief project task list detailing the personnel
to be utilized for engineering and design, fabrication, installation, startup,
demonstration, and training for this project. Include personnel resumes for all
personnel which will be performing services for this project. Provide name and
resume for the proposed project manager for this project.
4.
Quality Assurance Plan – Provide a brief summary of the CSI’s in-place quality
assurance plans for performing work from engineering through startup and
training.
5.
Facilities and Equipment – Provide a detailed list of office and fabrication
space, location where fabrication of panels will take place, and available meeting
facilities. List numbers and types of Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) software
and stations that are available for this project.
6.
Training – Provide an overview of training programs and capabilities to be used
for this project for both onsite training and off-site training.
7.
Maintenance – The CSI shall respond to a maintenance call within 4 hours,
providing onsite normal maintenance services within 24 hours following a
maintenance request, and emergency service within 8 hours following an
emergency service request. Maintenance call issues shall be resolved within 7
days. Normal and emergency maintenance service shall be made available 24
hours every day on a call basis for the warranty period. A point of contact and
telephone number(s) shall be provided.
8.
Reference Letters – Provide a minimum of five (5) reference letters
summarizing the CSI’s performance on similar projects. Reference letters shall
be from Contractors or Owners that have had contractual relationships with the
CSI on specific projects.
B.
Project Plan: Provide a complete Project Plan describing the development of the Process
Control System (PCS), complete with procurement schedule, progress meeting
dates, testing and delivery dates, and project milestones.
C.
Work Plan: Submit a detailed Work Plan for performing equipment modifications to
existing equipment as specified in the Contract Documents.
09/02/15
Control Systems Integrator
17012-4
2992/60270
D.
Deviations: If deviations to the Contract Documents are proposed, the CSI shall submit a
detailed description and explanation for each proposed deviation to the Contract
Documents.
E.
Drawings:
1.
Coordination Drawings:
a. Submit coordination drawings for review and approval by the Owner’s
Representative.
b. Coordination drawings shall be prepared by the CSI and shall include the
following as a minimum:
1) System block, one-line(s), SCADA one-line(s), and riser diagrams;
2) Interconnection wiring diagrams showing control panel and field
wiring to components, regardless of whether or not the components
are furnished by the CSI for panels and field devices furnished under
this Contract. Indication of field wiring to components shall include
terminations in intermediate terminal boxes (if applicable), field
devices and instrumentation, control panels and equipment, including
chemical feed pumps. Diagrams shall include terminal numbers for
all new terminations to equipment. These drawings shall be signed
during testing by the authorized person supervising the test. A
complete set of Instrument Loop Diagrams, prepared in conformance
with ISA-5.4-1991, with 5.2 Minimum Content Requirements and
5.3 Optional Content Information, showing all PCS components and
wiring, as well as software addresses and communications links, are
required and shall be developed by the CSI.
3) Control panel wiring diagrams for all control panels furnished
fabricated or modified by the CSI.
4) Scaled control panel elevations, panel layouts, subpanel layouts, door
layouts, terminal block details, name schedule, Bill Of Materials,
installation details, and equipment mounting racks.
2.
3.
4.
09/02/15
Drawings shall be prepared by the CSI and shall be developed on a Computer
Aided Drafting (CAD) system. The CAD system shall be AutoCAD 2008 or
newer.
Coordination drawings shall include wiring interconnections, terminations and
terminal numbers for connections to the above listed systems, to new panels, and
to devices furnished or fabricated by the CSI. Coordination drawings shall also
include interconnections to instrumentation not furnished by the CSI, such as
valve limit switches, motor operators for valves, analyzers and other field
devices. The scope of these drawings shall include any existing equipment to
which new equipment shall interface, all equipment provided by the CSI,
Electrical Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, and General Contractor as
specified in the Contract Documents.
Upon approval by the Owner’s Representative, shop drawings required to be
submitted for control panels may be submitted as part of the coordination
drawings specified herein. The CSI shall obtain specific written approval from
the Owner’s Representative for each panel shop drawing where the CSI requests
that the shop drawings be submitted as part of the coordination drawings
Control Systems Integrator
17012-5
2992/60270
5.
specified herein. The written approval shall be obtained prior to submitting shop
drawings. Shop drawings for panels submitted, as part of the coordination
drawings without this approval will be rejected.
Record Drawings:
a. Record Drawings shall be submitted on reproducible Mylar, with the
required number of sets of prints. Prints and reproducible Mylar shall be
full-sized. Once the record drawings are reviewed by the Owner’s
Representative, the CSI shall incorporate the Owner Representative’s
comments, submit required number of sets, and submit two copies of the
electronic files on DVD or CD. Files shall be formatted in AutoCAD 2008.
A list of drawing files with corresponding drawing titles shall be provided
with the DVD or CD. Record Drawings shall be provided after conditional
acceptance of the facility is approved and shall include all field changes and
design modifications made during construction.
F.
Operation & Maintenance (O&M) Manuals
1.
Comply with the O&M requirements specified in related Specification Sections:
a.
“Process Control Systems”
b. “Wireless Communications”
c. “General Conditions/General Requirements”
G.
Field Testing and Demonstration Plan
1.
Submit a testing and demonstration plan for the equipment and instrumentation
that is furnished by the CSI. The plan shall consist of two main components, 1)
testing and 2) demonstration. Both testing and demonstration shall include
individual field devices, individual pieces of equipment, and systems.
2.
Testing and demonstration of the components, equipment and systems shall
include details of staff to be used, testing equipment to be used, listing of
equipment and systems to be tested, and a detailed description for testing.
Testing shall include final testing of calibrated ranges and actuation settings of
instrumentation and field devices, testing of panel mounted controls and control
stations, and testing of interlocks, status indication and alarms between panels
and systems.
3.
The demonstration plan shall be similar to the testing plan in that the same tests
shall be performed for the demonstration as were performed during testing, for
the purposes of demonstrating the operation of the individual pieces of
equipment, instrumentation and systems. It shall also serve the purposes of
completing a final checkout of the systems. For the purposes of preparing the
plan, the CSI shall assume that a minimum of 6 persons employed by the Owner
will be witnessing the tests. The C SI shall notify the Owner in writing a
minimum of 7 calendar days prior to performing demonstration of operation of
the equipment and systems.
4.
Requirements for testing and demonstration of operation of equipment described
herein shall incorporate the requirements for testing and demonstration as
specified in related Specification Sections:
a.
“Process Control Systems”
b. “Wireless Communications”
c. “General Conditions/General Requirements”
09/02/15
Control Systems Integrator
17012-6
2992/60270
5.
6.
1.5
Plan shall include CSI’s participation in the system testing described in the
Special Provisions.
Provide a training syllabus for training the Owner’s personnel in the use,
function, and operation of the panels, instruments, devices, and the entire PCS.
Syllabus shall include equipment to be covered by the training, description of the
training to be provided, training aids and materials to be provided, duration of
each training session, and proposed schedule for training. Training syllabus shall
incorporate the training requirements specified in related Specification Sections:
a.
“Process Control Systems”
b. “Wireless Communications”
c. “General Conditions/General Requirements”
H.
Comply with the submittal requirements specified in related Specification Sections:
1.
“Process Control Systems”
2.
“Wireless Communications”
3.
“General Conditions/General Requirements”
I.
Prior to obtaining any material in connection with this Section, detailed shop drawings on
all material shall be submitted. Submittal requirements for equipment are listed in
individual equipment specification sections referenced in this specification section.
Requirements listed in this specification section are in addition to requirements listed in
other specification sections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
09/02/15
Qualifications
1.
The CSI shall be regularly engaged in the business of instrumentation and
controls (I&C) and shall be responsible for the furnishing, coordination, and
installation of the equipment specified herein.
2.
The CSI shall demonstrate the requisite resources of in-house staff, facilities and
finances to complete the project in the schedule specified. These resources shall
include personnel who are direct payroll employees of the CSI to engineer,
design, implement, fabricate, stage, and test the entire integrated PCS hardware
and software system at the CSI’s facilities. In-house personnel shall include all
disciplines associated with system manufacture, fabrication, and integration to
include but not be limited to engineering, drafting, analog and digital control
systems and wiring design, construction, wiring, labeling, software configuration,
programming, project management, quality control, field engineering and
training.
3.
The CSI shall assign a qualified person to be the CSI Project Manager for this
project. The Project Manager shall be a direct employee of the CSI, shall be
assigned to this specific project, and shall be skilled and experienced in project
management, and in the type of work described herein. The Project Manager
shall be assigned for the duration of the Contract. Should it become necessary to
replace the Project Manager, the CSI shall submit to the Owner’s Representative
the credentials of the qualified person assigned as a replacement.
4.
The CSI shall conduct Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT) as specified herein for
control panels and systems prior to shipment. The Factory Acceptance Tests
Control Systems Integrator
17012-7
2992/60270
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
1.6
Comply with the quality assurance requirements specified in related Specification
Sections:
1.
“Process Control Systems”
2.
“Wireless Communications”
3.
“General Conditions/General Requirements”
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
shall demonstrate that the equipment performs in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
No control panel is being provided as part of this project. Modifications are being
made to an existing cabinet on site. For the purpose of Factory Acceptance
Testing, the logic can be tested with the PLC on a bench top simulation.
The Factory Acceptance Tests shall demonstrate the proper operation of the
control logic described in the Contract Documents.
Qualifications of the proposed CSI shall be submitted as specified herein. It shall
be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to verify that the proposed CSI
meets the requirements of the Contract Documents.
The CSI shall develop and provide a trend screen for the new level transducer
(LT-101-2) and the existing Flow Control Valve (FCV-101). The trending screen
showing the level and valve position shall be used for valve tuning.
Comply with the delivery, storage and handling requirements specified in related
Specification Sections:
1.
“Process Control Systems”
2.
“Wireless Communications”
3.
“General Conditions/General Requirements”
WARRANTY
A.
Comply with the warranty requirements specified in related Specification Sections:
1.
“Process Control Systems”
2.
“Wireless Communications”
3.
“General Conditions/General Requirements”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
09/02/15
Comply with the product requirements specified in related Specification Sections:
1.
“Process Control Systems”
2.
“Wireless Communications”
3.
“General Conditions/General Requirements”
Control Systems Integrator
17012-8
2992/60270
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Comply with the examination requirements specified in related Specification Sections:
1.
“Process Control Systems”
2.
“Wireless Communications”
3.
“General Conditions/General Requirements”
3.2
PREPARATION
3.3
INSTALLATION
3.4
A.
Comply with the installation requirements specified in related Specification Sections:
1.
“Process Control Systems”
2.
“Wireless Communications”
3.
“General Conditions/General Requirements”
B.
The CSI shall provide onsite supervision and advice to the Electrical Contractor and the
General Contractor to insure the equipment is installed in accordance with the
specifications and the manufacturer’s requirements.
C.
Inspections & Field Calibrations
1.
Any and all testing equipment required for this project shall be owned by the CSI
so as to be immediately available for this project.
2.
The use of specific equipment manufacturer’s startup, calibration, and
troubleshooting personnel to assist the CSI shall be provided.
3.
Calibrate instrumentation and place each system into operation. The
commissioning of each system shall include the overall calibration and tuning of
all control loops and sequences to provide stable control of the process. The
validity of all process inputs and outputs for each system shall be checked and
corrected during the system commissioning. Final adjustment and calibration
shall be performed for all equipment prior to initiation of final testing.
TEST PLANS
A.
3.5
The CSI shall assist the Electrical Contractor and the General Contractor in developing
the detailed test plans for dry system tests, clean water system tests, and plant integrated
I/O tests as described in the Contract Documents.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
09/02/15
Comply with the field quality control requirements specified in related Specification
Sections:
1.
“Process Control Systems”
2.
“Wireless Communications”
3.
“General Conditions/General Requirements”
Control Systems Integrator
17012-9
2992/60270
3.6
3.7
STARTUP
A.
Comply with the startup requirements specified in related Specification Sections:
1.
“Process Control Systems”
2.
“Wireless Communications”
3.
“General Conditions/General Requirements”
B.
System Testing
1.
Testing of each system shall be scheduled, performed in an orderly sequence, and
conducted in the presence of, and to the satisfaction of the Owner’s
Representative. Testing shall be conducted for each component and system in
accordance with the CSI’s submitted testing plans that has been reviewed and
approved by the Owner’s Representative.
2.
Testing shall include the operation of all hardware, software, process control
logic, and custom control features.
3.
The CSI shall provide an onsite presence for the length of time necessary for
system installation, start-up, and commissioning of the PCS.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.
Demonstrate the control features of each panel and associated field mounted
instrumentation and control equipment, to verify that each panel performs the required
control functions and logic as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified. Control
features shall include relay energization, initiation of alarm conditions, resets, interlocks,
set point activation, and other functions of the control panels.
B.
Equipment shall be field demonstrated to operate satisfactorily in the presence of the
Owner, and shall be conducted in accordance with the CSI’s testing and demonstration
plan that has been reviewed and approved by the Owner’s Representative. Field
demonstrations shall be performed after successful installation, calibration and testing of
each control panel.
C.
In addition to demonstrating the operation of standard control features, special control
panel functions shall be demonstrated as specified for each panel as specified below.
D.
The CSI shall provide the necessary test equipment, process media, materials, supplies,
and qualified test personnel to perform the field demonstrations as specified herein.
E.
Field instrumentation control signals that are required to demonstrate the operation of
associated control panels may be simulated upon approval of the Owner’s Representative.
F.
In the event of failure of the field demonstration, the CSI shall perform the necessary
corrections and re-demonstrate, at his own cost and expense, the equipment as directed
by the Owner’s Representative.
G.
The CSI shall provide competent personnel to participate in the dry system tests, clean
water system tests, process water system tests, and plant integrated I/O tests, as set forth
in the Test Plan and as specified herein and elsewhere.
09/02/15
Control Systems Integrator
17012-10
2992/60270
H.
3.8
Comply with the demonstration and training requirements specified in related
Specification Sections:
1.
“Process Control Systems”
2.
“Wireless Communications”
3.
“General Conditions/General Requirements”
FOLLOW-UP SERVICE
A.
Comply with the follow-up service requirements specified in related Specification
Sections:
1.
“Process Control Systems”
2.
“Wireless Communications”
3.
“General Conditions/General Requirements”
END OF SECTION
09/02/15
Control Systems Integrator
17905-1
2992/60270
SECTION 17905
PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
This section includes the requirements for providing a complete process control system.
This section also includes the requirements for the Programmable Logic Controller
(PLC), Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) and related equipment including: power
supplies, I/O cards, control networks, control panel wiring guidelines, associated
equipment as specified and/or shown on Contract drawings, and including appurtenances
required for a complete control system.
B.
The Electrical Contractor shall obtain the services of an Instrumentation and Controls
subcontractor, as specified in Section “Control Systems Integrator”, who shall be
responsible for the coordination, supply, and integration of the equipment specified
herein. This subcontractor shall be referred to as the Control Systems Integrator (CSI).
C.
The CSI shall have total responsibility for the coordination, design, configuration (PLC
programming), I/O check out, full loop checks, integration (SCADA programming) and
the implementation of a complete and fully operational Process Control System (PCS) as
specified herein, specified elsewhere, and as shown on the Contract Drawings.
D.
The CSI is ultimately responsible for providing a fully functioning system, not the
Engineer. Contract Drawings of PCS control panels and cabinets are only to be used as
guidelines, not as detailed design. Detailed design is done by the CSI as specified herein
and specified in referenced related Sections.
E.
The CSI shall configure, startup, and commission all instrumentation, instrumentation
equipment, and components not supplied by major equipment Vendors as part of their
scope.
COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate work with general and electrical contractors as required to schedule and
complete the work.
B.
Equipment shall be located, installed, and wired as shown in the Contract Drawings.
C.
Coordinate installation with other Contracts for process and utility services piping (air,
water, etc.) to and away from equipment.
D.
Verify process connection(s), electrical connection(s), and ranges for both process and
electrical.
E.
Materials of construction shall be suitable for the intended application and environment.
F.
Install, wire, and configure per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
WORK INCLUDED
A.
This Section includes Process Control Descriptions for the process control system. The
Process Control System descriptions outline the system control and monitoring
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-2
2992/60270
functionality to be used as the basis for PLC programming, OIT graphics and SCADA
programming.
1.4
B.
The Level Control Panel (LCP) shall monitor equipment processes through a local PLC.
The PLC generally shall interface to hardware, instrumentation and vendor provided
equipment through discrete contacts and 4-20mA signals to monitor local process.
C.
The LCP shall also communicate with the controls and SCADA network through a radio
link at the Reservoir Pumping Station (RPS), as shown on the Contract Drawings.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A.
The CSI shall create new SCADA screens for the status and control of the new
equipment being installed as part of this contract. The new SCADA screens shall be
made to look consistent with the existing plant screens.
B.
The Level Control Panel (LCP) PLC will be capable of running autonomously as
standalone automation, and shall communicate to the SCADA all equipment status, realtime data and emergency/fault events. The WTP SCADA system shall also poll the LCP
PLC at predefined time periods and update system status and real-time data.
C.
The LCP shall be internally wired to terminal blocks for field wiring connections to
process equipment and field instruments, as shown on the Drawings and specified. All
I/O signals shall be fused separately.
D.
The LCP shall have a door-mounted Operator Interface Terminal (OIT). The OIT shall
be able to direct the process by communicating through the PLC, which will relay the
directions to initiate control algorithms programmed into the process controller.
E.
Functionality will always include a monitoring function that captures real–time values
from instrumentation.
F.
At the "field" end of the PCS hierarchy, field wiring interfaces with process equipment
shall be as follows:
G.
1.5
1.
DI: Remote NO and NC dry contact inputs powered by 120 VAC
2.
DO: isolated VAC/VDC relay output module
3.
AI: isolated 4-20 mA DC input current loop
4.
AO: 4-20 mA DC output current loop powered by the PCS cabinet
5.
All I/O signal circuits shall be fused separately.
Field instruments, process equipment control panels, valve actuators, and individual
process control discrete and analog devices shall transmit information and receive
commands from the PCS cabinets as shown on the Drawings.
RELATED WORK
A.
Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following
codes, standards and specifications, except where more stringent requirements have been
specified herein:
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
2.
National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-3
2992/60270
B.
1.6
1.7
3.
International Society of Automation (ISA)
4.
National Electrical Code (NEC)
5.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
6.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
Related Sections
1.
Instrumentation
2.
Control Systems Integrator
3.
Process Control System
4.
Wireless Communications
5.
General Conditions/General Requirements
DEFINITIONS
A.
AI/DI/AO/DO (Analog Input/Discrete Input /Analog Output /Discrete Output): Hardware
interface modules, accepts non-digital and digital inputs, and output non-digital signals
discrete signals.
B.
HMI (Human-Machine Interface): Hardware interface, consisting of a keypad and display
for the purpose of extracting and input data to a controller.
C.
OIT (Operator Interface Terminal): Hardware interface, consisting of a keypad and
display for the purpose of extracting and input data to a controller. Term is
interchangeable with HMI, above.
D.
PCS (Process Control System): A computer system with an operating system (OS) that
monitors the process environment and electronically controls the process flow based on
the various set-points given by the user. A PCS system usually consists of an HMI/OIT,
PLC, and a SCADA system.
E.
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller): A special computer device used for industrial
control systems, dedicated to run one program that monitors a series of different inputs
and logically manipulates the outputs for the desired control.
F.
SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition): Generally refers to the supervisory
software that enables the user to manipulate data and generate reports.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in conformance with the Division 1 Sections and Division 17
Sections.
B.
Material provided under this section shall be presented as a single bound submittal.
C.
Product Data: “Catalog cuts” and spec sheets marked to specifically indicate the
equipment and materials proposed for this project. Indicate selections with arrows, and
cross out irrelevant data. Label each data sheet with the tag ID assigned to the instrument.
D.
Shop Drawings: Electrical wiring diagrams/schematics, control panel and subpanel layout
details (to scale), Bill of Materials, terminal block details, SCADA (communications
networking) One-Line diagram(s). Prior to obtaining any material in connection with this
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-4
2992/60270
Section, detailed shop drawings on all material shall be submitted for review and
approval.
E.
Manufacturer Instructions: Installation instructions.
F.
In addition to the requirements specified in the General Requirements, provide the
following at the 25%, 100% and as-built stages of development.
1.
Preliminary Program Development Submittal (25%)
2.
The CSI shall provide a detailed summary outline defining the Graphic Screens
for the SCADA Workstations and the OIT. The outline shall include a hierarchy
format with a navigation plan for accessing each individual screen.
3.
Provide sample screens for the Main Display for each system in color, hardcopy
drafts.
4.
Provide a sample screens for a typical Equipment Display, and Equipment
Parameter Display in color hardcopy drafts.
5.
Provide samples of PLC ladder logic, register configuration and ordering of I/O.
Pre-Final Program Development Submittal (100%)
1.
The Pre-Final submittal shall be submitted prior to the system testing periods
specified in the General Requirements. The Pre-Final Submittal shall incorporate
the Engineer’s comments and modifications agreed upon during the Factory Test.
2.
Pre-Final submittal shall include PLC program ladder logic, all screens
developed for the SCADA workstation and OIT graphics, and all software
documentation.
Final Submittal (As-Built)
1.8
1.
The Final submittal shall incorporate all modifications and changes made during
field testing.
2.
Submittal shall include final version of all PLC logic, screens, and
documentation.
3.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Installation instructions, Configuration and
setup instructions, Quick start guides, User Manuals.
4.
Warranty Documentation: Start date, duration, conditions, manufacturer contact
information, local vendor or support representative contact information.
5.
Sustainable Design Closeout Documentation:
6.
Software: Vendor, Manufacture, and Contractor supplied.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All equipment and software furnished under this project shall be furnished by
manufacturers who meet the quality, workmanship, and experience requirements as
specified in the Division 1 Section.
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-5
2992/60270
1.9
B.
All equipment furnished under this project shall be by the same manufacturer, shall be
original equipment, and shall be assembled by the manufacturer at the factory.
C.
All equipment furnished under this project shall be new, of the latest design, original, free
from defects, and shall have a new warranty.
D.
All computer equipment & software shall be licensed and registered with the original
manufacturer or warranty company, in the name of the Owner.
E.
Equipment and accessories not specifically described or identified by manufacturer's
catalog numbers shall be designed in conformity with ISA, ANSI, ASME, ASTM, and
other applicable technical standards and shall have neat and finished appearance.
F.
The CSI shall provide all backup documentation certifying hardware compliance with
this specification as required by the Engineer. Any equipment provided by the CSI that
exceeds the requirements of this specification shall be provided at no addition cost.
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
All equipment, devices, and materials furnished by the CSI, as a part of the work of this
Contract, shall be accompanied by all information, instructions, warranty information,
paperwork, and data necessary for the proper and complete care, operation, maintenance
and repair by the Owner. Hardware manuals shall be furnished in accordance with
Division 1 Sections. Separate volumes shall be submitted for hardware and for system
software.
B.
The System Software O&M’s shall additionally contain:
C.
1.
I/O Lists
2.
Copies of the Process Control Description for each Loop
3.
Copies of the Graphics displays
4.
Copies of the Reports
The CSI shall generate and assemble “Operation & Maintenance” manuals containing the
following information and features as a minimum:
1.
Table of Contents
2.
Theory of Operation, Process Control Description
3.
Design and Operating Specifications, Criteria
4.
Recommended installation arrangement, locations, wiring, criteria, and
procedures
5.
Normal and emergency operating instructions, procedures and sequences for each
possible mode of operation
6.
Normal operating parameters, setpoints, configurations
7.
Troubleshooting procedures
8.
Preventative or routine maintenance requirements or recommendations
9.
Parts layout, identification, and assembly diagrams, including exploded views
with parts referenced by name and/or number
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-6
2992/60270
D.
1.10
10.
Parts lists of each assembly and subassembly showing part name, number, size,
composition and quantity required, down to discrete components
11.
Recommended spare parts stocking lists
12.
Names, addresses and telephone numbers of factory authorized or recommended
service representatives and parts suppliers
13.
Major overhaul and repair procedures including diagrams, measurements,
clearances, adjustment settings, and alignment procedures
14.
Any other information necessary or recommended for the complete and proper
operation, maintenance and repair of the equipment by the Owner’s personnel
15.
Where an item of equipment includes components or subassemblies
manufactured by other than the equipment manufacturer, all pertinent
information for the subassemblies shall be included in the equipment manual
prepared and compiled by the equipment manufacturer
16.
Software/Hardware operation & configuration information including all
information required to reinstall the system as it is currently operating in the
event the system fails
The Operation & Maintenance Manuals shall bound in 3-ring binders, utilizing tabbed
section dividers, and shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and acceptance in
accordance with the General Conditions.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide parts and labor warranty in accordance with the General Conditions.
B.
Provide an on-site parts and labor warranty for a minimum period of one year after
Substantial Completion for all equipment. In cases where the manufacturer offers a
longer warranty period, the longer warranty period shall apply as described by the
manufacturer.
C.
All equipment that are not fully functional at the time of Substantial Completion shall
have warranties extended to provide minimum one year coverage after making the
instrument operational, unless otherwise approved by the Owner’s Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A.
2.2
Equipment, wires and cables shall be marked in the field in accordance with Electrical
Specifications.
ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES
A.
Electrical enclosures shall have degree of protection ratings suitable for the intended
application (e.g., watertight, dust-tight, explosion-proof) and environmental conditions.
Electrical equipment enclosures shall at a minimum have the following ratings and
materials of construction:
B.
Indoor enclosures: NEMA 12 in clean and dry electrical rooms and control rooms.
NEMA 4X FRP in chemical rooms. All other areas, except Hazardous (Classified)
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-7
2992/60270
locations, shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel.
C.
2.3
2.4
2.5
All PCS cabinets and PCS control panels shall be UL 508A listed, with proper labeling
and documentation.
ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE
A.
Power conversion equipment, including computer power supplies and Uninterruptible
Power Supplies (UPS), shall be fitted with EMI (electromagnetic interference), RFI
(radio frequency interference), and telephone interference filters to limit interference
effects on other equipment in the surrounding area, in accordance with IEEE standards
and recommendations applicable to the equipment.
B.
Equipment may be powered from electrical sources that may include harmonic distortion,
surges, sags, and other electrical noise under normal operating conditions. Equipment
furnished under this Contract shall be installed with such accessories, surge protection,
power line conditioners, UPS, or other means as may be required for it to function
correctly in this noisy electrical environment.
C.
Power and signal wiring of all equipment located outside of buildings and inline
equipment (magnetic flow meters) shall be protected with surge arresting devices.
SIGNAL DEVICES
A.
Signal isolator/duplicator(s) shall be used for the retransmission of signals to other areas,
other locations, other loops, and especially when leaving the building.
B.
Signal isolator/duplicator(s) shall be provided as required to ensure adjacent component
impedance match where feedback paths may be generated, or to maintain loop integrity
during the removal of a loop component.
C.
Signal conditioners and converters shall be provided where required to resolve any signal
level incompatibilities or provide required functions.
GENERAL
A.
Equipment providing similar function shall be of the same manufacturer and, as much as
possible, the same model/series for purposes of parts interchangeability.
B.
Equipment shall be new, of the latest design, original, free from defects, and shall have a
new warranty.
C.
All “or equal” alternates shall meet and/or exceed all specified requirements, features,
and capabilities of the listed equipment and shall be submitted in accordance with the
Division 1 Sections.
D.
All cables, software, mounting kits shall be included, compatible with the PLC and OIT,
and manufactured by these same manufacturers.
E.
Copper communication cables shall be used for interior runs shorter than 300 feet
(coaxial can go longer). Use fiber optic cable for exterior runs and all runs longer than
300 feet and for peer-to-peer communications (LAN). For Wide Area Networks (WAN),
utilize radios with proper security hardware and software to prevent hacking.
F.
All fiber strands of each cable shall be properly terminated in a proper fiber optic patch
panel (provided and installed by the Electrical Contractor/CSI), using “SC” style
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-8
2992/60270
connectors. Each fiber strand shall be performance tested and a report shall be generated
and submitted to Engineer.
2.6
2.7
2.8
MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A.
Materials of construction shall be suitable for the intended application and environment
and fully compatible with the process being measured.
B.
Provide an acceptable environment for all enclosed equipment, utilizing cooling and
heating devices, humidity control, and power conditioners as needed.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Equipment shall be provided with accessories recommended by the manufacturer for
proper operation.
B.
Any devices, equipment, interfaces, hand-held devices, cables, connectors, necessary to
configure, modify, analyze, and calibrate supplied equipment shall be provided with the
equipment and be turned over to the Owner after successful commissioning.
C.
Where recommended by the manufacturer, power converters, reactors, or power supplies
shall be provided integral with the instrument.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory Quality Certification
1.
B.
Factory Assembly
1.
C.
2.9
Equipment shall be factory calibrated to minimize field adjustments and insure
proper operation.
Factory Test
1.
E.
Equipment shall be manufactured in accordance with the factory quality
certification documents.
Factory Calibration
1.
D.
Submit copy of factory quality assurance certificate.
Each instrument shall be factory tested as follows:
Manufacturer’s standard inspections and tests
1.
Performance test over calibrated range
2.
Submit factory test report for approval prior to shipment.
SHOP FINISHES
A.
With the exception of those parts and components customarily furnished unpainted,
prepare and coat all metal surfaces with rust inhibitive shop paint. Shop paint shall be
fully compatible with the field paint specified.
B.
Protect machined surfaces against damage and corrosion by other means.
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-9
2992/60270
2.10
SPARE PARTS
A.
2.11
Provide the following spare parts, packaged in their original unopened boxes, for use by
the Owner.
1.
1 – power supply of each type supplied
2.
1 – I/O modules of each type supplied
3.
25% spare fuses of each type used
B.
All equipment shall be provided with one (1) year of required supplies (paper, ink,
recordable media etc.), spare parts (bulbs, fuses, etc), and other apparatus necessary for
continuous and accurate operation.
C.
Spare parts shall include all parts normally provided by the manufacturer for systems of
similar size, construction, and purpose.
D.
All spare parts shall be packaged in separate containers with the part name and number
clearly marked.
E.
Package spare parts in boxes, labeled with the manufacturer’s name, address and
telephone number; local representative’s name, address and telephone number; name of
equipment the parts are for and list of parts contained therein.
F.
All spare parts shall be included in the base bid.
EQUIPMENT
A.
Instrumentation
B.
Level Element/Transmitter – Pressure – Submersible
1.
The level transmitter shall be a two-wire loop powered device, operating on 1030 Vdc, 60 Hz power and shall generate a continuous linear 4-20 mA dc signal
from hydrostatic pressure proportional to the water level.
2.
The sensor shall be a solid-state head-pressure sensing device, suitable for
continuous submergence, utilizing a breather tube. The sensor shall be not less
than 1 inch and constructed of Hastelloy C.
3.
Provide a NEMA4X junction box for terminating the sensor cable and breather
tube. Provide a breathable filter of Gore-Tex or similar for breather tube
reference pressure.
4.
Sensor cable shall not support the full weight of the sensor assembly. Provide
cable-grips as required.
5.
The sensor shall be provided with adequate sensor cable length. Provide sensor
with minimum cable of 30’. Contractor to field verify distance and adjust as
necessary. Coil excess cable in junction box.
6.
Manufacture/Model:
09/02/15
a.
PMC
b.
Pulsar
c.
GP50
Process Control Systems
17905-10
2992/60270
7.
d.
Omega
e.
Or equal
Schedule:
Tag
LT-101-2
C.
Description
Chamber No.2 Level
Range
0-20 Feet
Programmable Controllers
1.
PLC hardware
2.
For transparent and seamless peer-to-peer communications with the other system
control panel PLCs via Ethernet, the PLC supplied on this project shall be from
Allen-Bradley’s Logix family (CompactLogix). FlexLogix and Micrologix are
not allowed. Network and protocol converter boxes and converter software for
communications with Allen-Bradley Logix PLCs by alternate PLCs are not
allowed.
3.
All PLC system components shall be from the Allen-Bradley CompactLogix
family of products, no exceptions.
4.
Controllers with battery-backed static RAM and nonvolatile flash memory, or
approved equal.
5.
Port, reserved for local programming only.
6.
Two (2) 10/100Base-T Ethernet ports, one for local OIT communications, one
for LAN/WAN network communications.
7.
I/O and networking/communications cards & modules as required.
8.
Size PLC I/O back planes as required. A minimum of 25% spare slots shall be
available at installation. All empty slots shall have blank filler cards or protective
covers.
9.
25% spare I/O points of each type, installed and pre-wired to terminal strips.
10.
CPU requirements:
09/02/15
a.
Supports ladder logic, structural text and functional block programming;
b.
Have battery-backed RAM memory, rated for a minimum of 1 year with a
fresh battery. The battery shall be capable of maintaining RAM memory for
a minimum of 2 weeks after the “Battery-Low” indicating LED turns on;
c.
Be equipped with a “flash” EEPROM memory backup module, sized to
backup 100% the CPU memory (used and unused);
d.
Retain its program and data register contents indefinitely provided AC
power is maintained;
e.
Built-in math coprocessor;
f.
Have LED status indicators including “battery-low”;
g.
Built-in real-time clock and calendar;
h.
Timed-interrupted routine for examining specific information;
i.
Be sized to provide 50% spare memory after fully configured and
Process Control Systems
17905-11
2992/60270
programmed;
11.
I/O Networks:
a.
12.
I/O general:
a.
13.
14.
15.
All field instruments and field devices shall be hardwired to the PLC I/O
modules, utilizing conventional signals (4-20 mAdc, 24 Volts DC, 120 Volts
AC, dry relay contacts, etc.) over individual copper conductors. Intelligent
I/O networks for instrumentation shall not be used.
Discrete I/O:
a.
Discrete Input (DI) modules shall be 16-point 24Vdc. Filtering up to 10
milliseconds for contact bounce.
b.
Isolated 300 volts between field wiring and back plane.
c.
LED to indicate status on each point.
d.
Discrete Output (DO) modules shall be 16-point individually isolated dry
relay-contact type (2A minimum at 120VAC contact rating).
Analog I/O:
a.
2-wire loop powered instruments shall be powered from the same power
source within the same PCS cabinet. Single-ended analog input cards can be
used.
b.
4-wire non-loop powered instruments require isolated analog inputs. Singleended inputs shall not be used.
c.
All 4-20 mAdc analog outputs shall be isolated from each other.
Manufacturer/Model:
a.
D.
Other than Ethernet for OIT/SCADA, no other communication networks
shall be used.
Allen-Bradley CompactLogix
Operator Interface Terminals (OIT)
1.
Color touchscreen of not less than 10 inches viewable
2.
OIT shall be industrial hardened with a NEMA 4/4X bezel.
3.
Ethernet communications with PLC.
4.
Local process monitoring and control of the system shall be performed at the
OIT(s). Utilizing object-based graphical screens resembling the piping and
instrumentation diagrams, process values and equipment status shall be displayed
with dynamically colored objects and dynamic text. All process control
parameters and set points shall be accessible via pop-up windows utilizing multilevel security access.
5.
Active alarms, unacknowledged alarms, and alarm history shall be displayed.
Process values shall be displayed in real time.
6.
Each PLC enclosure shall have its own panel door mounted OIT.
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-12
2992/60270
7.
E.
F.
G.
Manufacturer/Model:
a.
Allen-Bradley PanelView Plus
b.
Or equal
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
1.
Provide individual UPS systems for each PLC/OIT cabinet.
2.
All PLCs, OITs, communications equipment, analyzers, transmitters, and PLC
I/O (except outputs) shall be powered from an Uninterruptible Power Source
located in the same cabinet(s), capable of powering 100% load for at least 30minutes during power outages.
3.
UPS shall be mounted in such a way as to allow replacement without significant
disruption to the other components or wiring within the box
4.
Utility power (interior light, utility receptacles, video monitor) is not powered
from this UPS.
5.
UPS shall be true “on-line”, line-interactive, double-inverting units, with true
sine-wave output.
6.
Provide UPS with maintenance-bypass breaker to permit temporary PLC
operation while UPS is removed for servicing or replacement.
7.
Provide UPS with relay interface card as necessary for status and alarming.
8.
Manufacture/Model:
a.
Liebert GXT3 Series,
b.
Or equal
Power Supply
1.
Provide a power supply separate from the plc assembly to power I/O signals and
field equipment.
2.
Power supply shall be sized to support all of the connected loads with an
additional 25% spare load capacity.
3.
120VAC input / 24VDC output
4.
Minimal Inrush Current Surge
5.
DC – Ok Relay contact
6.
Manufacturer/Model:
a.
Puls
b.
Sola
c.
Allen Bradley
d.
Or equal
Ethernet Switches
1.
09/02/15
10/100Base-T (RJ-45) auto-sensing, with a MDI-MDIX or automatic sensing
uplink port to connect to other devices.
Process Control Systems
17905-13
2992/60270
H.
2.
Switched 10/100 ports that run at 10Mbps, 20Mbps, 100Mbps, or up to
200Mbps, providing dedicated bandwidth in Half or Full-Duplex modes.
3.
NWAY Technology that detects cabling type, speed, and Duplex mode.
Compatible with all major network operating systems.
4.
Advanced “store-and-forward” packet switching to optimize data transfers.
“Auto partitioning” to protect the system from downed network lines.
5.
Signal regeneration to ensure data transfer integrity. Large enough to
accommodate 25% future connections.
6.
Provide “fault” status to PLC
7.
Industrial grade, rugged.
8.
Manufacturer/Model:
J.
N-Tron,
b.
Sixnet
c.
Or equal
Wireless Communication (point-to-point)
1.
I.
a.
See Section “Wireless Communications”
SCADA /OIT Programming
1.
Provide new SCADA and OIT screens for the new equipment, as shown on the
P&ID drawing/s.
2.
Provide a local Slide gate open/close control OIT screen, for both of the partition
wall slide gates. The screen shall indicate local, off, remote status, fault, as well
as the open/closed status of both slide gates. The local slide gate open/close
control OIT screen shall provide fully open, and fully closed control only, not
modulating.
Software
1.
Provide one (1) retail package (box and manuals included) of the PLC
manufacturer's most current “Professional Edition” PLC offline/online
programming software for use in conjunction with the PLC equipment supplied
(to become the property of the Owner). The software provided must be fully
compatible with the firmware level of all PLC hardware supplied. Provide all
communication cables necessary for a laptop computer to upload/download and
modify/monitor the PLC program offline/online.
2.
Provide one (1) retail package (box and manuals included) of the OIT
manufacturer's most current “Professional Edition” application development and
transfer utility software for use in conjunction with the OIT equipment supplied
(to become the property of the Owner). The software provided must be fully
compatible with the firmware level of all OIT hardware supplied. Provide all
communication cables necessary for a laptop computer to download the
application to the OIT.
3.
All software licenses shall not expire and support shall be renewable.
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-14
2992/60270
4.
All software provided shall be fully compatible with all the devices and
equipment it will be connected to. Hardware firmware levels and versions shall
also be fully compatible.
5.
All software shall be provided in retail boxes with full documentation, manuals,
media, and information cards.
6.
Provide all necessary communication cables and miscellaneous hardware
required by the software, to be turned over to Owner.
7.
Any additional software or drivers required by the PLC and OIT software shall
be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
8.
All software, licensing, and support shall be registered to the CSI until time of
substantial startup completion. At this time, the CSI shall transfer registration and
Ownership of all supplied software, licensing, and support to the Owner and
provide written proof of transfer.
9.
The CSI shall maintain, install, configure, and deliver all software updates,
patches, and revisions.
10.
The CSI shall pay up registration and technical support (in the Owner’s name)
with the software manufacturers for the entire duration of the project warranty
period so that there’s no lapse in software support or coverage for the Owner.
Project warranty period starts from the day of Owner acceptance, not the
completion of startup, or when the software was purchased.
11.
The CSI shall also provide the Owner two (2) identical DVDs, each containing
the same “fully-documented” CSI developed PCS software applications for all
PLCs, OITs, and PCS containing all program files (source code), cross
references, data tables, document export files, initial setpoint/startup values,
configurations, driver setups, applications, and all other files developed and used
by the CSI during development, debug, and successful startup.
12.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions for compliance with manufacturer’s installation
recommendations and requirements.
B.
Examine roughing-in of equipment to verify the following:
1.
Environmental conditions are within the limitations established by the
manufacturer.
2.
Each utility pipe and conduit is in the correct location.
C.
Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable conditions for installation,
for example, all overhead work of other trades is complete.
D.
Verify that ground connections are in place and that installation of grounding described
in Section “Grounding” is complete.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-15
2992/60270
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment as shown on the Contract Drawings and in accordance with the
manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations.
B.
Erect equipment in neat and workmanlike manner; align, level and adjust for satisfactory
operation. Install so that parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance
and repair. Equipment shall be mounted upright, vertical, at eye level, and in locations
easily and safely accessible. Minor deviations from indicated arrangements may be
made, but only after obtaining approval from the Owner’s Representative.
C.
AC power, DC power/signal, and communication cables shall be installed in separate
conduit systems, and shall be physically separated by a minimum of 12 inches.
D.
Electronic low-level signals (analog, discrete, and communications) shall be properly
isolated, bundled and supported. These signals shall be routed and separated from AC
power wiring.
E.
All “intrinsically safe” wires and cables shall be kept isolated and installed in separate
wire channels and conduit systems from normal power and signal wires - by at least two
inches of space. Label wire channels and conduits “Intrinsic Wiring”.
F.
Grounding
1.
Equipment shall be solidly grounded with an equipment grounding conductor as
specified in Section “Grounding” and as recommended by the manufacturer.
Control panels and instruments shall be grounded at the power supply end using
a ground wire pulled with the power wires.
2.
All instruments and transmitters shall be grounded at the device’s power source
by the CSI using a ground wire pulled with the power wires. Metal cases of
loop-powered instruments shall be grounded at the control panel powering the
loop using a ground wire pulled with the twisted-shielded pair of wires. All
transmitters and metal cases shall be grounded at the control panel with a ground
wire. Grounding through conduit and fittings and to grounds other than that of
the control panel are not acceptable.
3.
The shield in twisted-shielded pairs shall be grounded at the power supply end.
Meaning, 4-wire transmitters = ground at transmitter end, 3-wire transmitters =
ground at power source end, 2-wire transmitters = ground at loop power source
end.
G.
Furnish and install all mounting stands, supports structures, brackets and accessories as
required or detailed for the installation of the equipment furnished. Unless otherwise
specified or required, supports shall be galvanized steel. All mounting hardware shall be
stainless steel. Equipment mounted on walls in contact with soil or water shall be
mounted offset from the wall a minimum of ¼-inch.
H.
Cutting and drilling of existing panels for new equipment as shown, specified, or
required, shall include repair and touch up painting of panel after installation.
I.
Field cut the Level Control Panel (formerly Bubbler System), so that the OIT’s centerline
is approximately 55” above finished floor. Relocate pilot lights, switches and gauges as
necessary.
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-16
2992/60270
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests in accordance with the following standards:
1.
B.
C.
Prepare for Acceptance Tests as follows:
1.
After installing equipment but before power supply is energized, verify that
grounding system is completed.
2.
Verify that equipment is installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
3.
Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal
by means of point-to-point continuity testing.
4.
Verify that field-installed power and control wiring complies with the Electrical
Specification requirements.
5.
Verify that equipment is ready for pre-commissioning checks in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
Acceptance Tests: After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements as follows:
1.
2.
3.4
NETA ATS.
Perform visual and mechanical inspection and electrical tests according to
NETA ATS, Section 7, as it applies to all installed systems and devices. Certify
compliance with the following test parameters:
a.
Circuit Breakers: Perform tests and inspections stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7.6.
b.
Protective Relays: Perform tests and inspections stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7.9.
c.
Instrument Transformers: Perform tests and inspections stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.10.
d.
Metering and Instrumentation: Perform tests and inspections stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.11.
e.
Ground-Fault Systems: Perform tests and inspections stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7.14.
f.
Surge Arresters: Perform tests and inspections stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7.19.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
PROGRAMMING
A.
The CSI shall be responsible for the complete and satisfactory programming of all items
under their source of supply.
B.
All control logic shall reside in the PLC, not in the Operator Interface Units (OIT).
C.
All scaling of analog values and alarm/action setpoints to Engineering Units (EU) shall
be done in the PLC, not in the Operator Interface Units (OIT).
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-17
2992/60270
D.
PLC control logic shall be developed by applying the “Process Control Description of
Operation” (specified herein), the Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs), and the
Process Descriptions contained in each process equipment specifications.
E.
All action and alarm points shall be programmed with de-bounce delay timers and
deadband in order to reduce cycling.
F.
All local process monitoring and control of the system shall be performed by the OIT,
utilizing object-based graphical screens resembling the piping and instrumentation
diagrams.
G.
PLCs shall be programmed substantially in RLL (Relay Ladder Logic) language.
Programming shall be fully documented with descriptive names and explicit line by line
code comments.
H.
The CSI is responsible for the application development, configuration, testing, startup,
de-bugging, commissioning, and training of the entire PCS, including but not limited to:
1.
PLC(s) configuration, programming, testing;
2.
OIT(s) configuration and programming, process graphic screens development;
3.
SCADA configuration and programming, process graphic screens development;
4.
Communications networking setup, configuration, testing;
5.
Instrumentation configuration and testing;
I.
The entire PCS application development encompasses all field instruments and all control
systems provided by the other equipment suppliers. Process graphics screens and alarm
points shall be developed for all of these systems.
J.
The PCS shall be “Menu” driven. All operator functions shall be selected from a Master
menu or submenu, including system configurations.
K.
The PCS shall monitor and control analog and discrete points in real-time. Each point in
the system shall be scanned within 2 seconds. Alarm functions shall include alarming on
high or low limit exceeded for analog and change of state for discrete points. Alarms
shall be annunciated within 2 seconds of their occurrence.
L.
The PCS shall monitor, alarm, and log PLC CPU “Battery-Low”, “Major Fault”, and
“Minor Fault” conditions from all PLCs, including PLCs supplied by other vendors.
M.
The PCS shall monitor, alarm, and log control panel power loss and UPS faults at the
PCS Cabinets.
N.
The PCS shall include the following general features:
1.
Receive, store, and display data from the PLCs as digital and dynamic graphics.
Update digital data 500 ms from change of state. Update analog data within 500
ms from exceeding the exception dead-band. Dynamic data fields shall be
updated within 500ms.
2.
Receive and store manually entered data;
3.
Provide real-time data;
4.
Report change of state within 1 second;
5.
Record change of state on designated points (alarms, events, run schedules) and
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-18
2992/60270
date and time stamp;
O.
6.
Identify status change in up to eight-charter word or selected graphical
representation by color change, brightness, or flashing;
7.
Ability to record time interval between status changes (elapsed time).
8.
Provide alarm prioritizing for visual and audible or visual only notification.
9.
Provide a multi-level security access code system for access to operator functions
and control program changes.
10.
Process request for changes to control status, setpoints, tuning parameters,
control strategy modifications, and related process control monitoring.
11.
Process control requests, such as start/stop, open/close, setpoint changes, and
control strategy auto/manual status changes. The response from when the request
is made at the OIT(s) to when it is executed at the PLC shall have a maximum
response time of 2 seconds.
Graphics displays & editor (OIT)
1.
Graphic displays shall be based on the Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams
shown on the Drawings, with the enhancements described below. As a minimum,
the CSI shall develop one PCS screen for each Piping & Instrumentation
Diagram drawing in the Contract documents.
2.
Graphic displays shall be consistent with Owner’s existing system. Deviations
from this shall be approved by Engineer and Owner.
3.
Piping shall be shown with two lines, color coded to match the process fluid, and
with flow direction arrows inside the two-line piping. Flow direction arrows shall
be menu-selectable as static or dynamic (flashing).
4.
Symbols for pumps, valves, and instrumentation shall be developed using the
Owner's standard symbol library wherever possible. Customized symbols shall
be provided in cases where the standard symbols do not make the distinctions
between process equipment to the same level of detail as the Piping &
Instrumentation Diagrams.
5.
Equipment that is available to run shall be shown green [confirm with Owner],
equipment that is running shall be shown red [confirm with Owner], and
equipment that is not available shall be shown yellow [confirm with Owner].
6.
All graphic displays shall share a common "look and feel" and shall be consistent
with Owner’s existing system. Graphic displays titles should all appear in the
same location, background color schemes, font size and color should be the
same, and dynamic linking should be consistent. Each graphic screen shall have
three regions; Title Bar, Main Graphic Area and Navigational Area.
7.
Points in alarm shall be displayed flashing until acknowledged and displayed
with an alarm color until the point returns to normal.
8.
Analog values with bar charts shall vary in proportion with the current analog
value.
9.
Dynamic values shall be updated at least once every 2 seconds.
10.
Multiple-level password protection shall be provided for each screen and all data
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-19
2992/60270
entry. The Owner shall determine user names, passwords, and security level.
P.
3.5
11.
Screen areas may be tied to other displays, allowing displays to be linked.
12.
An alarm window of current alarms shall be placed at the top of the screen.
13.
The screen shall provide real-time digital display of all measured process
variables associated with that portion of the process represented on the screen.
14.
Tank levels shall be graphically and digitally displayed, both in percent of total
volume, and volume remaining in gallons. Tank shape shall be approximately the
same as the actual tank.
Alarm Summary Display Screen
1.
The “Alarm Summary” screen shall be accessible quickly via the Main Menu
screen and its own-programmed global “hot key”.
2.
This alarm summary display must show a list of active alarms in the system. As
new alarms are detected, entries are made to the display list. As the alarm
conditions clear, the entries are removed from the list.
3.
In addition to being able to configure the placement of the information (tag name,
current value, descriptor, time of alarm, and alarm status)
4.
Alarms can be acknowledged from the alarm summary display either individually
(by clicking on an alarm acknowledgment field) or for all alarms in the queue.
5.
The alarm summary display must provide sorting and filtering capabilities. The
user shall be able to filter on alarm area(s), alarm status and alarm priority. The
user must be able to sort on time, tag, alarm area, alarm priority and alarm status.
The user must be able to display field or fields about the alarm block in a column
format and do complex filtering.
PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
The operation of the modified Distribution Well shall consists of two modes, Combined Flow
(slide gates full open) and Split Flow (slide gates fully closed). The operator manually selects
operating mode by selection on OIT. Selected mode controls the position of the two slide gates,
when the gates Local-Off-Remote (LOR) is in the Remote position. Gates shall be operated
manually and automatically through the OIT.
When in Manual, the slide gates shall operate independently of each other. Control shall allow
operation with one gate (maintenace mode) out-of-service. The OIT and SCADA shall indicate
manual mode. When in Automatic, the gates shall operate in unison. The slide gates shall be
either fully open or fully closed. The OIT and SCADA shall indicate automatic mode.
If either of the two slide gates are not fully closed, the Distribution Well shall operate in the
Combined Flow mode of operation. If both of the slide gates are fully closed, the Distribution
Wet Well shall operate in the Split Flow mode of operation. The OIT and SCADA shall show the
Distribution well graphically as shown on the P&ID’s. The graphic shall indicate the combined or
split flow mode.
A.
Combined Flow: Maintains the existing operating conditions. The water in the
Distribution well consists of water from both the Reservoir and the Manasquan River, as
measured by the existing bubbler in Chamber No. 1. The level indication shall be
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-20
2992/60270
continuously displayed on the OIT and SCADA in Linear Feet, with High-High, High,
Low and Low-Low alarms. Highlight the Bubbler level indication in Combined Flow
mode to distinguish that the bubbler level is being used for control.
B.
3.6
1.
River (Intake Pool) Water Only: Water from the Manasquan River is pumped
via the intake pump station to the two intake pools at the NJWSA Manasquan
WTP site. Level in the intake pool is set using sluice gates. Water from the intake
pools, flow by gravity to the distribution well through a 36” main. Both the
intake pools and the distribution well operate at similar hydraulic grades and as
one large reservoir for the river water. An existing bubbler level control system
maintains level in the distribution well. The level is used to control the reservoir
intake pumps that pump into the intake pools.
2.
Intake Reservoir Water Only: Water from the reservoir flows by gravity to the
distribution well via a 66”/36” main. An existing 36” modulating ball valve
(FCV-101) on the reservoir distribution water main in conjunction with the
existing bubbler system controls level in the distribution well. To prevent
overflowing in the distribution well, a hydraulically actuated level control
guardian valve closes upon power failure.
3.
River and Reservoir Blend: To blend water from the river and the reservoir, the
level in the distribution well is lowered to 16.5’. This opens the 36” modulating
ball valve on the reservoir distribution water main, which modulates to maintain
level in the distribution well. At the same time, a portion of the river water is
dumped from the intake pool back to the river by opening a sluice gate that is at
the end of the intake pool after the intake pool spillway.
Split Flow: The River Water (Chamber No. 1) and the Reservoir Water (Chamber No. 2)
are completely isolated from the other. The level indication shall be continuously
displayed on the OIT and SCADA in Linear Feet, with High-High, High, Low and LowLow alarms.
1.
River (Intake Pool) Water (American Water): The Distribution Well Chamber
No. 1 will operate in the same manner and with the same characteristics as the
existing system. The water within this chamber comes solely from the
Manasquan River via the intake pool. The water level in Chamber No. 1 will
continue to be monitored by the existing bubbler, which will continue to control
the existing river intake pumps.
2.
Intake Reservoir Water (Water Treatment Plant): The Distribution Well
Chamber No. 2 will receive water from the 36” inlet from the Reservoir only.
The flow control valve (FCV-101) on the 36” intake from the reservoir will
maintain the level within the Chamber No. 2. A new submersible level transducer
(LT-101) will monitor the level.
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
The CSI shall prepare four (4) Operation & Maintenance Manuals as specified in the
General Specifications, consisting of equipment manufacturers’ O&M manuals, user
manuals, installation instructions, configuration instructions, etc., and specified
hereinafter. Each shall include:
1.
Index and tabbed section dividers.
2.
Reviewed submittals.
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-21
2992/60270
B.
3.7
3.
Wiring diagrams.
4.
Field adjustable settings (e.g. setpoints, ranges, spans current alarm trips)
5.
Manufacturer’s instructions on care and operation of equipment.
6.
Warranty certificates.
7.
Spare parts list.
8.
Complete typewritten operating instructions, covering all systems descriptions
and operation, emergency operating instructions and precautions.
9.
Post-startup version of the “Process Control Description of Operation” document,
as revised, modified, and updated by the CSI.
10.
“SCADA User’s Manual” - OIT and SCADA application (project related) user’s
guide, providing screen description and instructions, navigation instructions,
symbol descriptions - identifying all possible states and colors, alarming and
trending navigation and manipulation instructions, report generating instructions,
starting/stopping application, application utilities, automatic and manual
manipulation control of equipment from the screens, etc.. Essentially include all
the guidance the Owner and Operators will need to properly operate and maintain
the PCS. The CSI shall prepare this document since the CSI developed the
application(s).
11.
Name, address and telephone number of supplier and representative of
manufacturer for each item of equipment in Contract.
Bind above items (all unused, clean, and legible) in three ring binders and submit to the
Owner’s Representative for review and approval. Provide all required copies of reviewed
and approved portfolios before request for final acceptance.
STARTUP
A.
The CSI shall provide the services of the PCS programmer during the “de-bugging” and
commissioning phases of startup. Changes to the PCS application that may be required
for changes in the control or equipment encountered in the field during construction and
startup shall be completed at no additional cost.
B.
All PCS networking, communications, and functionality shall be checked, tested,
verified, and made fully functional and operational by the CSI.
C.
The CSI shall provide the necessary test equipment and qualified test personnel.
D.
Prior to the commissioning of all new equipment, the CSI shall perform a “Field
Acceptance Test” in the presence of the Owner’s Representative and/or the Owner, using
reviewed and approved IQ/OQ (Installation Quality / Operation Quality) testing
procedures and documentation. Each field device and instrument must be successfully
checked out through the OIT screens for proper operation, control, and status.
E.
In the event of failure of the field test, the CSI shall perform the necessary corrections
and retest, at his own expense, until approved/accepted by Owner.
F.
Final acceptance will be dependent upon the satisfactory operation and performance after
installation.
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17905-22
2992/60270
3.8
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.
3.9
Train the Owner, the Owner’s Operators, and the Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain the equipment.
1.
Train personnel for a minimum of 2-8 hour sessions on procedures and schedules
for energizing and de-energizing, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining
equipment and schedules.
2.
Review data in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
3.
Schedule training with Owner, with at least 14 days advance notice.
FOLLOW-UP SERVICE
A.
Monitoring and Adjusting: After Substantial Completion, but not more than twelve
months after Final Acceptance, perform the following monitoring and adjusting tasks:
1.
Replace failed and defective equipment (under warranty).
2.
Recalibrate and reconfigure as necessary.
3.
Retest and adjust as necessary.
END OF SECTION
09/02/15
Process Control Systems
17910-1
2992/60270
SECTION 17910
WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
1.
Wireless I/O and Transmitter/Receiver Set
2.
Mounting hardware and accessories
3.
Cabling and accessories
4.
Antennas and accessories
5.
Grounding kits
This Section shall apply to all instrumentation furnished on this project, regardless of
whether it is specifically identified in this Section.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
1.3
This section includes communications equipment required to construct a data collection
and control system that shall comprise a communications system in conjunction with the
other Division 17 specifications. Hardware specified herein includes, but are not limited
to, the following.
Comply with the latest revision of the following codes, standards and specifications,
except where more stringent requirements have been specified herein:
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
2.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Owner’s Representatives (IEEE)
3.
International Society of Automation (ISA)
4.
National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
5.
National Electrical Code (NEC)
6.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
Related Specification Sections
1.
Control System Integrator
2.
Process Control System
3.
Wireless Communications
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with the Division 1 Section Requirements and
Division 17, Process Control Systems Sections.
B.
Provide a complete on-air test report, after all equipment is installed, consisting of the
following:
09/02/15
Wireless Communications
17910-2
2992/60270
1.
A computer generated plotted profile based upon the GPS readings and display
showing the topography between:
a.
1.4
Distribution Well and the Reservoir Pumping Station (RPS) (Line-of-Sight
Profile). Develop profile based on existing structures.
2.
A printout of the link analysis based upon the actual radio installation and
frequency being used (RF Communications Link Analysis).
3.
Provide the actual RSSI (received signal strength indication) between the sites,
and an indication of data throughput.
4.
From on-air test, provide the best solution (radio model identifying: frequency,
elevation, angles, azimuth, noise cancellation, etc.) to communicate reliably and
accurately between sites.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Attenuation – The natural reduction in signal power that occurs when a signal travels
over a long distance.
B.
DBM – Used to express absolute values of power relative to a milli-watt.
C.
FHSS – Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum method of transmitting signals by rapidly
switching a carrier among many frequency channels, using a pseudo-random sequence
know to both receiver and transmitter.
D.
Line of sight – An unobstructed line between two transmitting devices.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION (POINT-TO-POINT)
A.
Contractor shall be responsible for connection of license free, Frequency Hopping Spread
Spectrum (FHSS) wireless communication interface, including: receiver, transceiver,
grounding kits, cables, mounting hardware and all other appurtenances required to create
a wireless network.
B.
Wireless Network shall include, but is not limited to:
09/02/15
1.
Configure, test, and demonstrate wireless communication between facilities.
2.
Provide support during the course of construction. Rectify wireless
communications within 24 hours.
3.
Wireless 5.1-5.9 GHz radio interface:
a.
License free, Wireless Ethernet Bridge
b.
Antenna: 5.xGHz 25dBi Panel Antenna.
c.
Cable: Cat 5E Ethernet Cable.
d.
Connector Kit: Includes connectors, ground kit, and weatherproof kit surge
protection, and jumper cable.
e.
Antenna Height: Mount on antenna mast, roof, tanks or other structures as
Wireless Communications
17910-3
2992/60270
shown on the Contract Drawings.
f.
g.
Performance Requirements:
1)
10-30 Vdc PoE on LAN
2)
-40 to +60 degree C
3)
600Mbps Industrial Wireless Ethernet Bridge
4)
2x2 MIMO operation up to 256QAM
5)
(2) Gigabit Ethernet Ports (WAN+LAN with PoE), (2)N-Type
6)
Selectable PtP and PmP Modes
7)
Rugged, Long Range, Outdoor AP (Access Point/Station)
Manufacturer/Model:
8)
C.
Provide/modify programming of radio communications at the Reservoir Pumping Station.
1.
D.
Provide a time scheduled polling of the Distribution Well at the Reservoir Pump
Station PLC.
a.
Poll equipment status data every 5 minutes (confirm with Owner)
b.
Poll real-time data every 30 seconds (confirm with Owner)
Provide programming of radio communications at the Distribution Well.
1.
2.2
Trango Systems / Altum AC
Provide a “report by exception” polling of the Distribution Well if an alarm
condition occurs or an event is initiated.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Provide all necessary cabling including, but not limited to, hardwire, switch uplink
cabling, patch cords, network modem Category 6 Ethernet cabling and power cords in
lengths as necessary, not to exceed 300 feet, to locate equipment as specified and directed
by the Engineer.
B.
Provide grounding requirements in accordance with the national Electric Code and all
local codes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Connect all radio equipment, configure wireless devices, locate equipment within
enclosures in locations as shown on the Contract Documents and as directed by the
Engineer. Install and connect antennas on exterior structures, as shown on Contract
Documents, complete with connectors, grounding, surge protection and weather kits.
Provide protection of antenna and cable from wind damage.
B.
Wireless Radio Configuration - Include on-site time for a factory-trained, manufacturer’s
representative to configure as follows:
09/02/15
Wireless Communications
17910-4
2992/60270
3.2
1.
If necessary, program IP addresses into each switch using IP addresses supplied
by the Engineer or Owner.
2.
Configure parameters appropriate for an industrial control network.
3.
Assist in troubleshooting network issues at the request of the Engineer.
C.
Provide adequate put-up lengths on cable reels to make termination-to-termination runs
without splices. Spliced cables are not acceptable.
D.
Pull cables per manufacturer recommended methods and pull-out tensions.
E.
Support cables in riser conduits at intervals as required by NEC and cable manufacturer.
CERTIFICATION OF TESTING
A.
Unless waived in writing by the Engineer, all tests shall be made in the presence of a duly
authorized representative of the Owner. When the presence of such representative is so
waived, certified results of the tests made and the results thereof shall be furnished by the
Radio manufacturer or its representative.
B.
All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Owner. Written notice of all tests shall
be given to the Engineer and Owner at least two weeks in advance.
END OF SECTION
09/02/15
Wireless Communications